JP6669605B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of performing variable display.

  As a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is fired into a game area by a launching device, and when a game medium wins in a winning area such as a winning opening provided in the game area (also referred to as a “start winning”), a predetermined value is obtained. Some prize balls are paid out to players. Further, a variable display device capable of variably displaying (also referred to as “fluctuations”) identification information when a game medium wins in a specific winning area (also referred to as a “starting area”) is provided. There is a configuration in which when a display result of variable display of information becomes a specific display result, control can be performed to an advantageous state advantageous to a player.

  The advantageous state means an advantageous state for a player to whom a predetermined game value has been given. More specifically, the advantageous state is, for example, a state in which the special variable winning means is changed to a state in which the game medium is likely to win (a jackpot game state), or a state in which a right to a state advantageous to the player is generated. And a state in which a predetermined game value is given, such as a state in which a condition for paying out premium game media is easily satisfied.

  In such a gaming machine, when a display result of a variable display device that displays a symbol as identification information is a predetermined combination of specific display modes (specific display result), it is generally referred to as a “big hit”. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game medium shifts to an advantageous state (big hit game state) where it is easy to win. Then, in each open period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning prizes is won, the winning prize opening is closed. An opening time (for example, 30 seconds) is determined for each opening, and if the opening time elapses even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the winning opening is closed.

  Further, in a gaming machine capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to a variable display (for example, a hold display corresponding to a variable display that has not been started yet, an active display corresponding to a variable display being executed), a specification different from the normal mode is specified. In some cases, a specific display is displayed. For example, the active display is performed in a specific mode in which a sub icon “SP” indicating that the game reaches super reach is added, and the sub icon disappears at the start timing of the super reach to change to the normal mode. (For example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2013-240380 A (paragraphs 0094 and 0108, FIGS. 11 to 13)

  However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, it was not possible to increase the expectation for the specific display after changing to the normal mode.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase a sense of expectation for a specific display.

(Means 1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of executing variable display, and displays a specific display (for example, hold display or active display) corresponding to the variable display at least in a normal mode (for example, “white”). )), A high expectation mode having a higher expectation than the normal mode (for example, “red”), and a suggestion mode for suggesting the effect contents (for example, an effect suggestion display mode (first special suggestion mode, second special suggestion mode) Specific display means (for example, steps S662, S662a, S3713, S3717, S3721, and S3721 in the effect control microcomputer 100) that can be displayed in any of the display modes including the following. S3725, S3726, S4702, S4705, S4708, S4711, and S4714) and a suggestion mode specific display. The effect execution means capable of executing the effect of the contents (for example, by executing steps S8006 and S8105 in the effect control microcomputer 100 according to the process table selected in step S8004, the special zone effect, the pseudo ream, and the super A part capable of executing a reach effect) , and the effect executing means is capable of executing a plurality of advance effects including at least a first advance effect and a second advance effect, and the suggestion mode is the first advance effect. The specific display means includes a first suggestion mode that suggests execution and a second suggestion mode that suggests execution of a second notice effect , and the specific display means displays the specific display in the first suggestion mode, and then displays the first notice effect. the specific display but at any timing of the plurality timings after being executed (e.g., 5 seconds after the effect of what is suggested is executed) And can vary the display mode from the first suggested embodiment the high expectation embodiment, capable of displaying specific indication to expectation are different depending on whether changes from the first suggested aspect at any timing to high expectations embodiment Yes, after displaying the specific display in the second suggestion mode, the display mode of the specific display is changed from the second suggestion mode to the high degree of expectation at any one of a plurality of timings after the second announcement effect is executed. Ri changeable der to embodiment (e.g., effect control microcomputer 100, step S4702, S4705, S4708, S4711, by executing the S4714, when any of P02~P05 as pending change pattern has been selected to, hold display, or active display has been displayed by the director suggested display mode, it is possible to change to "red"), one of the timing Wherein the degree of expectation, depending on whether changes to the high expectation embodiment from the second suggested embodiment is capable of displaying a specific display differently. According to such a configuration, a sense of expectation can be increased.
Also, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player, a first effect display device and a second effect display device , a holding storage unit that stores information relating to variable display as a holding memory, and a specific display. and a change suggested demonstration execution unit capable of executing the change suggested effect suggests that display mode is changed, the specific display means displays the specific display using the first effect display device in response to the hold memory are possible, the change suggested demonstration execution means, across the change of specific display of the display form a first change suggested effect suggests, the first effect display device and the second performance display device using the first effect display device In such a mode, a second change suggestion effect that suggests a change in the display mode of the specific display can be executed. When the first change suggestion effect is executed and the display mode of the specific display changes, the second change suggestion effect can be executed. Direction is executed When the display mode of the specific display is changed, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state differs when the display mode of the specific display changes, and the display mode of the specific display does not change regardless of which of the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect is executed. The ratio at which the display mode of the specific display changes between when the first change suggestion effect is executed and when the second change suggestion effect is executed may be different.

In (unit 2) means 1, demonstration execution means, be displayed specific display at suggested manner, it may not perform the effect of what has been suggested by a particular display suggestions manner (e.g., for the effect control By performing step S3715 after Y of step S3714, the microcomputer 100 can display the hold display or the active display in the second special suggestion mode even when the special zone effect is not executed. (2) When the hold display or the active display is displayed in the special suggestion mode, the special zone effect, which is the suggestion content, may not be executed.), And the specific display means displays the content suggested by the specific display of the suggestion mode . even if the effect is not executed, it can change the specific display of the display mode being displayed by suggesting manner to the high degree of expectation aspect (For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes steps S4706 to S4708 to execute the special zone effect even though the hold display or the active display is displayed in the second special suggestion mode. Alternatively, it can be changed to “ red”). According to such a configuration, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation when the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the suggestion mode is not performed.

In (unit 3) means 1 or means 2, a particular display means at a high high expectations aspects of expectation than suggested embodiment, it is possible to display a particular display (e.g., presentation control microcomputer 100, " A pending change pattern displaying "red" is selected at the rate shown in FIG. 39B (step S3701), while the display of the second special suggestion mode is determined at the rate shown in FIG. 41B (step S3715). Therefore, the hold display or the active display may be displayed in “red” having a higher degree of reliability for the 15R probability change hit or the 8R probability change hit than the second special suggestion mode). According to such a configuration, the sense of expectation for the high expectation degree aspect can be increased.

In any of (unit 4) means 1 means 3, a specific display means, with a high degree of expectation aspect higher expectations than effect of what is suggested by the specific display suggestions embodiment, capable of displaying specific indication some (for example, effect control microcomputer 100, whereas selects at proportions shown a pending change pattern to display a "red" in FIG. 39 (B) (step S3701), the presence or absence of execution of the special zones directing FIG By determining at the ratio shown in FIG. 36 (A) (step S3505), the hold display or the active display is displayed in “red”, which has a higher degree of reliability for the 15R probability change jackpot or the 8R probability change hit than the special zone effect. (Can be displayed). According to such a configuration, the sense of expectation for the high expectation degree aspect can be increased.

(Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to 4, the specific display means can further change the display mode of the specific display changed from the suggestion mode to the high expectation mode (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 If P04 is selected as the pending change pattern and active is selected as the change timing, the steps S4705, S4708, S4711, and S4714 are executed, and then the steps S4701 and S4702 are executed. The display mode may be changed from the effect suggestion display mode to “red” and further changed to “gold”. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the display mode of the specific display after the mode is changed to the high expectation mode .

(Means 6) In any one of the means 1 to 5, the specific display means includes a plurality of suggestion modes having different suggestion contents (for example, a first special suggestion mode, a second special suggestion mode, a pseudo continuous suggestion mode, a SP suggestion mode). It is capable of displaying specific indication in a manner) at kinds based in different proportions of the suggested embodiments, varying from suggesting embodiment the specific display of the display mode to the high degree of expectation embodiments (e.g., the effect control microcomputer 100 By using the tables shown in FIGS. 41 (A) to 41 (D), it is determined whether or not to display in each of the effect suggestion display modes, so that it is a pending change pattern including “red” (other than P01). The ratio of which effect suggestion display mode is displayed differs. Therefore, the ratio is changed to "red" at a different ratio depending on the type of the effect suggestion display mode.) There. According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the display mode of the specific display.

  (Means 7) In any of the means 1 to 6, the first effect device (for example, the sub-display device 9S (sub-display device)) and the second effect device (for example, the effect display device 9 (main display device)) The specific display means is capable of displaying a specific display using the first effect device (for example, a suspended display or an active display in the active display area 9A, the sum reserved storage display unit 18c provided in the sub display device 9S). Can be displayed), and a change effect executing means (for example, effect symbol change start processing in the effect control microcomputer 100) capable of executing a change effect (for example, a pending change notice effect) capable of changing the display mode of the specific display. (The part for executing the pending change announcement effect in step S801), and the change effect execution means can change the display mode of the specific display using the first effect device. A first change effect (for example, a first hold change notice effect (hold change notice effect 1 with action effect A, hold change notice effect 3, hold change notice effect 5)), a first effect device, and a second effect device. The second change effect (for example, a second hold change notice effect (hold change notice effect 2 with action effect B, a hold change notice effect 4, a hold change notice effect 4, a hold change notice) The effect 6)) can be executed, and the degree of expectation differs depending on whether the first change effect or the second change effect is executed and the display mode of the specific display changes (for example, as shown in FIG. 53). In addition, when the second hold change announcement effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display changes, the first hold change announcement effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display changes, and High expectations (reliability) It is also possible. According to such a configuration, a plurality of types of change effects can be executed, so that the effect of the change effects can be improved.

  (Means 8) In any one of the means 1 to 7, the game machine is capable of performing variable display and controlling the player to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) which is advantageous to the player. A specific display (for example, this time display) indicating the degree of expectation (for example, big hit expectation degree) controlled by the state is displayed (for example, this time display is displayed in the presently displayed area 5K), and the advantageous state (For example, a fixed decoration design or the like, or effect control CPU 101 or the like for displaying a fixed decoration design), and a variable display execution period (FIG. 55 (B)). After a predetermined notification indicating that the vehicle is not controlled to be in the advantageous state (for example, a notification of a temporary loss using a decorative pattern as illustrated in FIG. 55 (F)) is performed during a period illustrated in FIG. Specific table (For example, as shown in FIG. 55 (H) to FIG. 55 (K), white (circle) → yellow (square) → red (double circle) → rainbow (star) and this time display A specific notification (for example, notification of a big hit by a fixed decorative pattern as shown in FIG. 55 (L)) indicating that the state is changed to an advantageous state and controlled to be in an advantageous state may be performed. According to such a configuration, unexpectedness can be given to enhance interest.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko gaming machine from the front. It is a block diagram showing the example of circuit composition of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board, and a sound output board. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by a CPU on a main board. It is a flowchart which shows a 4ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern of the effect symbol prepared beforehand. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern type determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern type for outliers. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of a design specification command. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a hold | maintenance specific area and a hold buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation process at the time of a winning. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a special symbol change. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows the production control main processing which the production control CPU executes. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a command storage area at the time of a start winning. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows a special zone control process. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a special zone entry lottery table, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an execution number determination lottery table, (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an entry failure effect execution execution lottery table, D) is an explanatory diagram showing an execution timing determination lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows hold display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows hold display control processing. (A) is an explanatory view showing a pending change pattern determination table, and (B) is an explanatory view showing a selection ratio of red pending. It is explanatory drawing which shows a change timing determination lottery table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a first special suggestion execution lottery table, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a second special suggestion execution lottery table, and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a pseudo consecutive suggestion execution lottery table. (D) is an explanatory diagram showing an SP suggestion execution lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol variation start process in the effect control process process. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a stop symbol of an effect symbol. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration example of process data. It is a flowchart which shows a special zone setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the effect symbol change in the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect design fluctuation stop processing in the effect control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display at the time of displaying a hold display in a 2nd special suggestion aspect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display at the time of displaying a hold display in a 2nd special suggestion aspect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display at the time of displaying an active display in a 2nd special suggestion mode. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a pending change announcement effect determination table in a first modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation mode of the reservation change notice production | presentation effect in the modification 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation mode of the reservation change notice production | presentation effect in the modification 1. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a display example of the image display device according to a second modification.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an example of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as viewed from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape and provided in a game frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that is installed to be freely openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical components and the like are attached, and various components attached to them (game components to be described later). (Excluding the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hit ball supply tray (upper tray) 3. Below the hitting ball supply tray 3, a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing hitting balls are provided. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure that includes a plate-like body constituting the board and various components attached to the plate-like body. On the front surface of the game board 6, there is formed a game area 7 in which the shot game balls can flow down.

  The member forming the surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 4 is formed in a stick shape (rod shape) at a predetermined position (for example, a central portion of the lower tray) on the upper surface of the lower tray main body. A stick controller 122 that can be held and tilted in a plurality of directions (front, rear, left, and right) is attached. Note that the stick controller 122 is provided with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger or the like) in a state where the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 122 with the operation hand (for example, the left hand). A trigger button 121 (see FIG. 3) capable of performing an instruction operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 125 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a predetermined instruction operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button 121 is provided inside the operation rod of the stick controller 122. 3). Further, a tilt direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a tilt operation on the operation rod is provided in the lower portion of the stick controller 122 inside the main body of the lower plate. The stick controller 122 has a built-in vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 3) for causing the stick controller 122 to vibrate.

  The member that forms the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 has a predetermined instruction operation performed by a player at a predetermined position (for example, above the stick controller 122) on the near side on the upper surface of the upper plate main body. A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a player's operation performed on the push button 120 may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 120. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are in a vertical positional relationship at the center of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, the mounting position of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may be set to the position on the upper plate and the lower plate that is shifted to the left or right while maintaining the vertical positional relationship. Alternatively, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may not be in the vertical position but may be in the left and right positional relationship.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided. The display screen of the effect display device 9 has an effect symbol display area for effecting variable display of effect symbols in synchronization with variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that variably displays effect symbols. The effect symbol display area has a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative symbols (for effect) of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area may not be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, The three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed on the first special symbol display 8a, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special symbol is being performed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is performed on the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, a symbol other than the symbol which is the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left and right middle symbols) continues for a predetermined time, and the big hit symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol becomes the same symbol). (Combination of symbols), stopped, rocked, scaled or deformed, or multiple symbols fluctuated synchronously with the same symbol, or the positions of displayed symbols were switched. An effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is referred to as a reach effect. The reach state and the state thereof are referred to as a reach mode. Further, a variable display including a reach effect is called a reach variable display. Then, if the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, the result is “missing” and the variable display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner as the effect of the liquid crystal display in the effect display device 9 is described. However, the effects performed by the effect display device 9 are the same as those described in this embodiment. Instead, for example, an effect having a predetermined story characteristic may be executed, and an effect of displaying the result of the story based on the determination result of the big hit determination or the variation pattern may be executed. For example, while performing a professional wrestling or soccer game or a battle effect where enemy and ally characters fight, a performance that wins the game or battle if it is a big hit, and a performance that loses the game or battle if it is out of place Is also good. Further, for example, instead of displaying a result such as a win or loss, an effect of sequentially developing a predetermined story such as a story may be executed.

  In the upper right part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d for displaying a fourth symbol next to the effect symbol and a special symbol and a normal symbol described later. In this embodiment, a fourth symbol display area 9c for a first special symbol, in which a fourth symbol for a first special symbol is displayed in synchronization with a variable display of a first special symbol, which will be described later, A fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol is provided in which the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable symbol display of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the effect design change display is executed in synchronization with the special design change display (exactly, however, the effect design change display is changed on the effect control microcomputer 100 side). It is performed by measuring the fluctuation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing an effect using the effect display device 9, for example, the effect contents including the change display of the effect symbol disappear from the screen for a moment. The production mode has been diversified, for example, the production is performed, and the production is performed such that the movable object blocks all or a part of the screen. For this reason, even if the user is looking at the display screen on the effect display device 9, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the current state is in the variable display state. Therefore, in this embodiment, by performing the variable display of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, the state of the fourth symbol is checked to determine whether the current state is the variable display. Whether or not it is possible to recognize it. It should be noted that the fourth symbol is always displayed in a variably manner with a constant operation and does not disappear from the screen or is shielded by a shield, so that it can always be visually recognized.

  The fourth symbol for the first special symbol and the fourth symbol for the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a fourth symbol, and the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol and the second special symbol are sometimes referred to as the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a fourth symbol display area.

  The fluctuation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state in which the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are repeatedly turned on and off at predetermined time intervals with a predetermined display color (for example, blue). . The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol are synchronized. Synchronous means that the variable display starts and ends at the same time and the variable display period is the same. Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, a display color (a display color different from a loss. For example, a color of a loss) in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Sometimes it is displayed in blue, but in the case of a big hit, it is displayed in red.If the display color is different depending on the type of big hit (15R probable big hit, 8R probable big hit or sudden probable big hit) When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, a display color reminiscent of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. (A display color different from the loss. For example, the color is displayed in blue at the time of the loss, and is displayed in red at the time of the big hit. The display color may be changed depending on whether it is an R-variable jackpot, an 8R-variable jackpot, or a sudden-variable jackpot.) The fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are turned off. The display color at the time is desirably a display color (for example, black) different from the background image in order to prevent the display color from disappearing after being turned off and being assimilated with the background image.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the fourth symbol display area is provided in a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown, but a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED is used separately from the effect display device 9. To realize the fourth symbol display area. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately turned on, and any one of the two LEDs is stopped. It may be configured to indicate whether or not the big hit symbol has been stopped and displayed depending on whether or not it has been displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which separate fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. However, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbol may be provided in a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Further, a fourth symbol display area common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be realized by using a light-emitting body such as a lamp or an LED. In this case, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, by performing a display in which display of different display colors is repeatedly turned on and off at predetermined time intervals, the variable display of the fourth symbol may be executed separately. In addition, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, Alternatively, by performing a display in which lighting and extinguishing are repeated at different time intervals, the variable display of the fourth symbol may be executed separately. Also, for example, the same big hit symbol is used when deriving and displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol and when deriving and displaying a stop symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. Alternatively, a stop symbol in a different mode may be stopped and displayed.

  On the right side of the center of the game board 6, a first special symbol display (first variable display section) 8a for variably displaying a first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers from 0 to 9. That is, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) of 0 to 9. On the right side of the first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display (second variable display section) 8b for variably displaying a second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers from 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) of 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed, for example, in a square shape. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), but the types may be different. In addition, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display, for example, numbers from 00 to 99 (or two-digit symbols).

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol display (variable display unit). May be.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which two special symbol displays 8a and 8b are provided, but the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol display.

  In the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the execution condition of the variable display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball is the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening). 14 (including winning), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of storages to be held is not 0, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) This is started based on the establishment of a state and a state in which the big hit game is not executed), and after a variable display time (variable time) elapses, a display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. The passing of the game ball means that the game ball has passed through an area that is previously determined as a winning area, such as a winning opening or a gate, and includes a concept that the game ball has entered (wins) the winning opening. It is. Deriving and displaying a display result means that a symbol (an example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed.

  Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 13 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning port 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6, and is detected by the first start port switch 13a.

  Below the winning device having the first starting winning port (first starting port) 13, a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 in which a game ball can be won is provided. The game ball that has won the second starting winning port (second starting port) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6, and is detected by the second starting port switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable winning prize ball device 15 is opened, the game ball can enter the second starting winning port 14 (the starting winning is easily performed), and the state becomes advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning prize ball device 15 is in the open state, a game ball is more likely to win in the second starting winning opening 14 than in the first starting winning opening 13. Further, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second starting winning port 14. Therefore, in the state where the variable winning prize ball device 15 is in the closed state, game balls are more likely to win in the first starting winning opening 13 than in the second starting winning opening 14. In the state where the variable winning prize ball device 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured such that it is difficult to win, but it is possible to win (that is, it is difficult for the game ball to win).

  Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable prize ball device 15 is controlled to be in an open state, a game ball heading for the variable prize ball device 15 is extremely easy to win the second starting winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly below the effect display device 9. However, the distance between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening 13 is provided. The nails are densely arranged in the vicinity of the first starting winning opening 13, and the arrangement of the nails in the vicinity of the first starting winning opening 13 makes it difficult for game balls to be guided to the first starting winning opening 13. May be made higher than the winning rate of the first starting winning port 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball device 15 that opens and closes only the second starting winning port 14 is provided. A configuration in which a variable winning ball device that opens and closes any of the starting winning ports 14 may be provided.

  Above the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, the number of activated prize balls entering the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is the starting memory or the starting winning memory) ) Is provided with a first special symbol reservation storage display 18a including four displays for displaying the same. The first special symbol hold storage display 18a increases the number of lighted displays by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of illuminated displays is reduced by one.

  Further, above the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, there are four displays for displaying the number of activated prize balls entering the second starting winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved storage number. A second special symbol hold storage display 18b is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 18b increases the number of lighted displays by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of illuminated displays is reduced by one.

  In addition, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, a total pending storage display unit 18c that displays the total number (the total pending storage number) that is the total of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number is provided. ing. In this embodiment, by providing the sum pending storage display unit 18c for displaying the total number, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of the execution conditions that do not satisfy the start condition of the variable display. . In the present embodiment, in the combined hold storage display section 18c, the first hold memory and the second hold memory are used to display the image of the game ball to the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. In addition to being displayed in a winning order, it is displayed in such a manner that it can be recognized whether it is the first hold memory or the second hold memory (for example, the first hold memory is displayed in a red frame, and the second hold memory is displayed. (Displayed in blue).

  In the present embodiment, as a display mode of the hold display displayed on the total hold storage display unit 18c, a normal display mode indicating the reliability of a 15R / 8R probability change big hit, and an effect indicating execution of a predetermined effect And a suggestion display mode.

  The normal display mode includes “white” displayed in white, “red” displayed in red, and “gold” displayed in gold, and the reliability of a 15R / 8R probability change big hit. Is gold> red> white.

  The effect suggestion display mode includes a first special suggestion mode that indicates that a special zone effect is to be announced by displaying the characters “special” and a special zone effect that displays the characters “special?”. A second special suggestion mode indicating that the subject is a notice subject of the above, a pseudo-link suggestion mode indicating that the pseudo-run is to be executed by displaying the character "NEXT", and displaying the character "SP" And a SP suggesting mode that suggests that the system will develop into super reach. The first special suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when the special zone effect is to be announced, whereas the second special suggestion mode is selected regardless of whether the special zone effect is to be announced. This is a display mode to be obtained. In addition, the pseudo-link suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when the pseudo-link is executed, and the SP suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when developing into super reach.

  Note that the special zone effect is an effect of displaying a special background different from a normal background by one change or a plurality of continuous changes. In addition, the special zone effect has a configuration in which the greater the number of executions, the higher the reliability with respect to the 15R / 8R probability change jackpot. Hereinafter, starting the execution of the special zone effect may be referred to as “entering the special zone”. Immediately before entering the special zone, a successful entry effect is executed. The entry success production is a production that indicates that it is decided to enter the special zone after suggesting entry into the special zone (for example, as shown in FIGS. 49 (4) and (5) described later, “special entry”). The effect of displaying “Success!” After displaying “Zone Chance!”). In addition, when not entering the special zone, an entry failure effect that gives a sense of expectation to the player by suggesting entry into the special zone may be executed. For example, after suggesting that the vehicle will enter the special zone in the same manner as the successful entry effect, an effect indicating that the vehicle will not enter the special zone (for example, “Failure ...” is displayed after “Special zone chance!” Is displayed) Direction) can be executed as an entry failure effect. Hereinafter, the entry success production and the entry failure production may be collectively referred to as "entry announcement production". The rush notice effect is an effect performed for three seconds from the start of the change. When entering the special zone, the special zone effect is started three seconds after the start of the change (at the end of the successful entry effect). In addition, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation | variation which performs a rush announcement effect is shorter than 3 seconds, the rush announcement effect shall be forcibly terminated 1 second before the fluctuation stop. At that time, when entering the special zone, the successful entry effect is forcibly terminated and the special zone effect is started.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the combined hold storage display unit 18c, the hold display for the hold storage that has not yet been changed is performed, and during the time from the start of the change display for the hold storage to the end, The hold display for the hold storage is continuously displayed on the active display unit 18d different from the total hold storage display unit 18c. That is, the active display (variable display corresponding image) corresponding to the active variable display is displayed on the active display section 18d. The active display is an image indicating the reliability of occurrence of a big hit based on a change during execution. The display mode of the active display is the same as the above-mentioned hold display mode (“white”, “red”, “gold” which is the normal display mode, the first special suggestion mode and the second special suggestion display effect presentation mode). Suggestion mode, pseudo-link suggestion mode, SP suggestion mode).

  In the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold display and the active display is determined when the corresponding hold storage is generated (at the time of starting winning). Specifically, when a start winning is generated, first, a change mode of the normal display mode (a hold change pattern and a change timing described later) is determined, and then it is determined whether or not to display in the effect suggestion display mode. I do. When it is determined not to display in the effect suggestion display mode, the hold display is started in the normal display mode from the timing of the start winning. Further, when it is determined that the display is to be performed in the presentation suggestion display mode, the display of the hold display is started in the presentation suggestion display mode from the timing of the start winning, and the presentation of the suggestion content is performed (for example, 5 seconds after starting the special zone production, 5 seconds after performing re-variation in the pseudo-run, 5 seconds after starting super reach, or when it is determined not to execute (for example, rush failure) When the effect is performed), the display is changed to the normal suggestion display mode.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. The effect symbol as the symbol is variably displayed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Also, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the user of the big hit. Is stopped and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball device 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and a specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled by the solenoid 21 to be in the open state in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when is displayed, the large winning opening, which is a winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  On the left side of the game board 6, a normal symbol display 10 is provided. The ordinary symbol display device 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “O” and “X”) called ordinary symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the ordinary symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, the variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols become visible when lit). For example, if the lower lamp is lit at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. . When the stop symbol on the ordinary symbol display device 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 is such that when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the player is in a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state to the player (a state in which game balls can enter the second starting winning port 14). Changes to In the vicinity of the ordinary symbol display 10, there is provided an ordinary symbol hold storage display 41 having a display unit of four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls passing through the gate 32. Each time a game ball passes through the gate 32, that is, each time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the symbol holding storage display 41 normally increases the number of lit LEDs by one. Then, every time the variable display of the ordinary symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be turned on is decreased by one. Furthermore, a high-probability state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit is higher than that of a normal state (a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a result of a special symbol change display is increased compared to the normal state) However, except for the high probability / low base state described later), the probability that the stop symbol on the ordinary symbol display 10 will hit the symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times the variable winning ball device 15 is opened are increased. .

  At the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there are provided decorative LEDs 25 which are blinkingly displayed during the game, and at the bottom there is an out opening 26 for taking in a hit ball which has not won. In addition, two speakers 27 that emit sound effects and voices as predetermined voice outputs are provided on the right and left upper sides outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on a front frame is provided.

  The gaming machine has a hit ball launching device (not shown) that drives a drive motor in response to a player operating a hit ball operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the drive motor to launch game balls into the game area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball fired from the hitting ball launching device enters the game area 7 through a hit ball rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and thereafter descends from the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 13 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display 8a starts the variable display (fluctuation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts the variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning in the first starting winning opening 13. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first reserved storage number is increased by one on the condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When a game ball enters the second starting winning opening 14 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 2), the variable display (fluctuation) of the second special symbol is started on the second special symbol display 8b, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning in the second starting winning port 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved storage number is increased by one on the condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when a big hit of a predetermined type occurs, the game is shifted to a so-called probable state after the end of the big hit game, the game state is shifted to the high probability state, and the game ball is easily started and won (ie, (The execution condition of the variable display in the special symbol display devices 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 is easily established). In the case of the high base state, for example, as compared with the case of not being in the high base state, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is increased, or the time in which the variable winning ball device 15 is opened is extended. It is easy to win the starting prize. In this embodiment, when a big hit occurs, the state is always shifted to a high probability state. However, when a big hit occurs, a so-called time saving state (for example, a low probability state, , A high base state).

  Note that, instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display device 10 shifts to the ordinary symbol probable state in which the probability that the stopped symbol hits the symbol is increased. This may cause a transition to a high base state. When the stop symbol on the ordinary symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In this case, by controlling the transition to the normal symbol probable state, the probability that the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 hits the symbol is increased, and the frequency of the variable winning ball device 15 being opened is increased. Therefore, if the state is shifted to the normal symbol change state, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and a state in which starting winning is easy (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol or when the stop symbol of the special symbol is a positive variation symbol, and the like, from the disadvantageous state for the player. The state changes to an advantageous state (a state in which the starting winning is easy). Note that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept that also includes changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Further, by shifting to the normal symbol time-saving state in which the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 10 is shortened, the normal symbol may be shifted to the high base state. In the normal symbol time reduction state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of the normal symbol hitting increases. Accordingly, as the frequency of winning the normal symbol increases, the frequency of the variable winning ball device 15 being opened increases, and the winning prize ball device 15 becomes easy to win (high base state).

  Also, by shifting to the time-saving state in which the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the special symbol and the effect symbol is shortened, the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the effect symbol is shortened, so that the fluctuation of the special symbol and the effect symbol starts. This increases the frequency (in other words, the speed of the storage of the hold memory becomes faster), and it is possible to reduce a situation in which an invalid start winning is generated. Therefore, an effective start winning is more likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility that a big hit game is played increases.

  Furthermore, by shifting to all of the above-mentioned states (open extended state, ordinary symbol positive change state, ordinary symbol time-saving state, and special symbol time-saving state), it becomes easy to start winning (to shift to the high base state). You may. In addition, by shifting to any one of the above-mentioned states (open extended state, ordinary symbol change state, ordinary symbol time-saving state, and special symbol time-saving state), it becomes easy to start winning (high base State). In addition, by shifting to only one of the above-described states (open extended state, ordinary symbol positive change state, ordinary symbol time-saving state, and special symbol time-saving state), the starting prize can be easily made (high). (Transition to the base state).

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 2 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing a control operation according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer may have at least the RAM 56 in addition to the CPU 56, and the ROM 54 may be external or internal. Further, the I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates a hardware random number (a random number generated by a hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM serving as a non-volatile storage unit, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on the power supply board 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 are preserved for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply becomes incapable of discharging the capacitor as the backup power supply). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special symbol process flag or a high probability flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. In addition, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating a progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up by a power supply.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) hereinafter executes (or performs processing). Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to the microcomputer mounted on a board other than the main board 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether to make a big hit based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing. Based on the fact that the winning time is when the numerical data is read (extracted), the read numerical data has a random number generation function that becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 503 includes a function of selecting and setting an update range of numerical data (a function of selecting and setting an initial value and a function of selecting and setting an upper limit), a function of selecting and setting a rule for updating numerical data, and a method of selecting a rule for updating numerical data. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  The game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, the predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 (an ID number assigned to each product of the game control microcomputer 560 with a different numerical value) stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54. The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as an initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random numbers generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for providing detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving a solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and a solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 forming a special winning opening in accordance with a command from the microcomputer 560 for game control. 31.

  The game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a and a second special symbol display 8b for variably displaying special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying normal symbols, and a first special symbol holding storage. The display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol hold storage display 18b, and the normal symbol hold storage display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit 64 that outputs an information output signal such as big hit information indicating occurrence of a big hit game state to an external device such as a hall computer via the terminal board 160 is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (comprising an effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 9 for variably displaying the effect symbols is performed.

  Further, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35, and from the speaker 27 via the audio output board 70. Control of the sound output.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, a microcomputer is not mounted on the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information on effects such as effect symbol process flags. Note that the RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 100 is not backed up by a power supply. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal (from the main board 31) input via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103 in response to the effect control INT signal). The effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 100, and maps the VRAM there. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) according to the received effect control command. The CGROM previously stores character image data and moving image data to be displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, data of persons, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect designs), and background image data. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in accordance with a command from the effect control CPU 101. Then, the VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 allows the signal input from the relay board 77 to pass only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (the signal does not pass in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  The relay board 77 allows the signal input from the main board 31 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77) as a signal direction regulating means. Is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. Further, a unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Further, the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 through the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, so that the signal from the relay board 77 to the inside of the main board 31 is regulated. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be provided outside the output port 571 (on the side of the relay board 77).

  The effect control CPU 101 inputs, via the input port 106, an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation on the trigger button 121 of the stick controller 122 has been detected. The effect control CPU 101 inputs, via the input port 106, an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation on the push button 120 has been detected. The effect control CPU 101 inputs, via the input port 106, an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation on the operation stick of the stick controller 122 has been detected, from the tilt direction sensor unit 123. . The effect control CPU 101 outputs a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port 105 to cause the stick controller 122 to vibrate.

  Further, effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to lamp driver board 35 via output port 105. The effect control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitting body such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates a voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs the generated voice or sound effect to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs to the speaker 27 an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the audio synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706. The sound data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a group of data indicating the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined time period (for example, a fluctuation period of the effect symbol) in chronological order.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of a reset terminal to which a reset signal is input becomes high, and the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process from step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designated address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After the initialization of the built-in device (initialization of CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) as built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) (step S4), the RAM can be accessed. (Step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, an address synthesized from a value (1 byte) of a specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and an interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This is a mode indicating an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input through the input port (step S6). If ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

  When the clear switch is not in the ON state, it is checked whether or not data protection processing (for example, processing for stopping power supply such as addition of parity data) of the backup RAM area has been performed when power supply to the gaming machine has been stopped. (Step S7). After confirming that such a protection process has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes an initialization process. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing.

  After confirming that the processing at the time of power supply stop has been performed, the CPU 56 checks data in the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power is restored after an unexpected power outage or other power supply interruption, the data in the backup RAM area should have been saved, and the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, the initialization processing executed at the time of turning on the power and not at the time of recovery from the stop of the power supply is executed.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 returns the game state restoring process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in a work area (an area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data is set for an area of the work area that may be initialized. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that must not be initialized remain. The part which should not be initialized includes, for example, data indicating a game state before power supply is stopped (a special symbol process flag, a high probability flag, a high base flag, etc.), and an area where the output state of the output port is stored (output Port buffer), a portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set, and the like.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure restoration designation command as an initialization command at the time of restoration of power supply (step S43). Further, the CPU 56 transmits a display result designation command to the effect control board 80 which designates a display result (15R probability change big hit, 8R probability change big hit, sudden change big hit, small hit, or miss) stored in the backup RAM. (Step S44). Then, control goes to a step S14. In step S44, for example, when the value of a special symbol pointer described later is also stored in the backup RAM, the CPU 56 also transmits the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command (see FIG. 13). You may make it. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may restart the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command.

  In this embodiment, the value of a variable time timer described later is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, the measurement of the stored variable time timer is restarted, and the variable display of the special symbol is restarted. When the value of the fluctuating time timer has timed out, a symbol determination designation command described later is further transmitted. In this embodiment, the value of a special symbol process flag described later is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power is restored, the special symbol process processing is restarted from the process corresponding to the value of the stored special symbol process flag.

  Instead of always transmitting the display result designation command at the time of restoration from power failure, the CPU 56 may first confirm whether or not the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is 0. . If the value of the fluctuation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. It may be determined that the state is not the state and the display result designation command is not transmitted.

  Further, the CPU 56 may first confirm whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. It may be determined that it is not inside and the display result designation command is not transmitted.

  In this embodiment, whether or not the data in the backup RAM area is stored is confirmed by using both the backup flag and the check data, but only one of them may be used. That is, one of the backup flag and the check data may be used as a trigger for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). In the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) is initialized to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value is set. May be initialized. Alternatively, predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. The start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a flag for selectively performing processing according to the control state, such as a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball storage buffer, and a special symbol process flag, is initialized. The value is set.

  The CPU 56 also issues an initialization designation command (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed initialization processing) for initializing a sub-board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted). Is transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, performs an initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 503 (step S14). The CPU 56 makes settings for causing the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R, for example, by executing processing according to a random number circuit setting program.

  Then, in step S15, the CPU 56 sets a register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (Steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (Step S17) and the initial value random number update process (Step S18) in the main process. When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt is prohibited (step S16), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt is enabled. It is set (step S19). In the present embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when it is not a big hit or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when a big hit is not made. The random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of a counter for generating a display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of a counter for generating an initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial value of a count value of a counter (normal symbol hit determination random number generation counter) for generating a random number for determining whether or not a symbol is a hit. It is a random number to determine. A game control process for controlling the progress of a game described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls a game display device, a variable prize ball device, a ball payout device, and other game devices provided in the game machine by itself. In this process, the count value of the random number for the normal symbol hit determination is one round (the normal value of the random number for the normal symbol hit determination) in the process of transmitting the command signal to control the other microcomputer, or the game machine control process. (Step by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of possible values)), the initial value is set to the counter.

  In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed using an effect symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9. When the display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol, a reach effect is executed. In the case of the sudden change big hit, the sudden change big hit symbol (for example, “135”) may be stopped and displayed without reaching the reach. When the display result of the special symbol is not a big hit symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not to execute a reach effect by performing a lottery for determining a variation pattern type and a variation pattern using random numbers. I do. However, it is the effect control microcomputer 100 that actually controls the reach effect.

  When a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes a timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interruption process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not the power-off signal has been output (whether or not the power-on signal has been turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. Then, in the power-off detection process, upon detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for storing necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and the states of these are determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the ordinary symbol display 10, the first special symbol reservation storage display 18a, the second special symbol reservation storage display 18b, the ordinary symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). Regarding the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b and the ordinary symbol display 10, a drive signal is output to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S32 and S33. Execute control.

  Further, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol hit determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number updating process, display random number updating process: steps S24 and S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol process (step S26). In the special symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed in accordance with the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the special symbol process flag for controlling the special winning opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, a normal symbol process is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to a normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of transmitting an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process of outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, in response to the detection of a winning based on the turning-on of one of the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, and the count switch 23, the payout control microcircuit mounted on the payout control board 37. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 according to a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output processing).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol display control process for setting special symbol display control data for performing an effect display of the special symbol in an output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S32).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process of setting the ordinary symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the ordinary symbol in the output buffer for setting the ordinary symbol display control data according to the value of the ordinary symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“O” and “X”) of the fluctuation speed of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set when the start flag relating to the fluctuation of the normal symbol is set. At such a speed, the display control data value set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “「 ”and 0 indicating“ x ”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. In addition, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer, thereby executing the effect display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display device 10.

  Thereafter, an interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process ends.

  According to the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. Note that the game control processing corresponds to the processing of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt processing. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed in the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set. May be executed.

  When the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9 are stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the effect symbol is changed after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. Without reaching the reach state, a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not reach the reach may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal non-reach” or “non-reach non-reach”) variable display mode when the variable display results in a non-reachable symbol.

  When the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9 are stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the effect symbol is changed after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. The reach effect is executed after the reach state is reached, and a predetermined combination of effect symbols that does not ultimately become a big hit symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lost”) when the variable display result is “losed”.

  In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Finally, in the "left", "middle", and "right" symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R of the effect display device 9, the effect symbols are all stopped and displayed. In some cases, a suddenly changing big hit symbol (for example, "135") is stopped and displayed without reaching reach.)

  When the small hit "5" is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the variable display mode of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9 is "Suddenly probable big hit". After the effect symbols are variably displayed in the same manner as in the case of, a predetermined small hit symbol (suddenly the same symbol as the probable variable big hit symbol, for example, “135”) may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the stop display of the small hit symbol “5” on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. .

  Here, the small hit is a hit which is permitted up to a smaller number of times of opening of the special winning opening compared to the big hit (in this embodiment, two times of opening for 0.1 second). Note that when the small hitting game ends, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the probable state to the normal state or from the normal state to the probable state. Further, the sudden change big hit means that the number of times the big winning opening is released is allowed to be small in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, the opening of 0.1 seconds is twice), but the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely large. It is a short jackpot and a jackpot that shifts the game state after the jackpot game to the positive change state (that is, by doing so, the player suddenly appears to be in the positive change state) Is). That is, in this embodiment, the sudden change big hit and the small hit have the same opening pattern of the big winning opening. By performing such control, if the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 second, it is impossible to recognize whether it is a sudden change big hit or a small hit, so that the player has a high probability state. (Probable change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  When all the big hit types are configured to be the probable big hits, the small hits need not be provided. In addition, in the case where a small hit is provided when all the big hit types are probable big hits, as shown in the present embodiment, a sudden probability change without a high base It is preferable to provide a big hit.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA-1 are used as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “outside” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”. A variation pattern of the reach PA1-5 is prepared. In addition, as a variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “outside” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “reach”, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 , Super PA3-1 to super PA3-2, and fluctuation patterns of super PB3-1 to super PB3-2. In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-ream used when no reach is performed is performed once again. When the normal PB2-1 is used among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of the reach and accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-run, the re-change is performed once. In addition, when the normal PB2-2 is used among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of the reach and accompanied by the effect of the pseudo ream, the re-change is performed twice. Furthermore, when the super PA3-1 to the super PA3-2 are used among the fluctuation patterns which are used in the case of the reach and produce the effect of the pseudo-run, the re-variation is performed three times. In addition, the re-variation is to perform the variable display of the production symbol again after temporarily stopping the production symbol that is once out of the range from the start of the variable display of the production symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Also, as shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, as a variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, normal PB2 -3 to Normal PB2-4, Super PA3-3 to Super PA3-4, Super PB3-3 to Super PB3-4, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-3, Special PG2-1 to Special PG2-2 Is prepared. In FIG. 6, the fluctuation patterns of the special PG1-1 to the special PG1-3, the special PG2-1 to the special PG2-2 are the fluctuation patterns used when suddenly changing large hits or small hits. In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, when the normal PB2-3 is used among the fluctuation patterns that are used when the sudden change is not a big hit or a small hit and produce a pseudo-run effect, the re-change is performed once. In addition, when the normal PB2-4 is used among the fluctuation patterns used in the case of the reach and accompanied by the effect of the pseudo ream, the re-change is performed twice. Furthermore, when the super PA3-3 to the super PA3-4 are used among the fluctuation patterns which are used in the case of the reach and produce the effect of the pseudo-run, the re-variation is performed three times. In addition, the fluctuation pattern of the special PG1-3 used in the case of the sudden change big hit or the small hit and accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-run is re-changed once.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, when the fluctuation time is fixedly determined according to the type of the reach (for example, in the case of Super Reach A with a pseudo run, the fluctuation time is 32). .75 seconds, and the fluctuation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds in the case of the super reach A without the pseudo run.) For example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, Alternatively, the fluctuating time may be made different according to the total number of stored suspensions. For example, even in the case where the same type of super reach is involved, the fluctuation time may be shortened as the total number of pending storages increases. Also, for example, even in the case of the super reach of the same type, when performing the fluctuating display of the first special symbol, the fluctuating time may be made different according to the first reserved storage number. When performing the fluctuation display of the two special symbols, the fluctuation time may be varied according to the second number of reserved storages. In this case, a separate determination table is prepared for each of the values of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number (for example, a fluctuation pattern type determination table for the reserved storage numbers 0 to 2 and the reserved storage numbers 3 and 4). A variation pattern type determination table is prepared in advance), and a determination table may be selected according to the value of the first number of retained storages or the second number of retained storages, to vary the variation time.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of big hit (15R certain big hit, 8R certain big hit, sudden certain big hit) (for big hit type determination)
(2) Random 2 (MR2): Determines the type (type) of the variation pattern (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR3): Determines a variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR5): Determine initial value of random 4 (for determining random 4 initial value)

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by first using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) to determine the variation pattern type, and using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) to determine the variation pattern. One of the variation patterns included in the pattern type is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by the two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is obtained by grouping a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, a plurality of fluctuation patterns are grouped by the type of reach, and a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with normal reach, a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with super reach A, and a fluctuation pattern with super reach B are included. It may be divided into a variation pattern type. Also, for example, a plurality of fluctuation patterns are grouped by the number of times of re-change of the pseudo run, and a change pattern type including a change pattern without pseudo run, a change pattern type including a change pattern of one re-run, A variation pattern type including a variation pattern with two fluctuations and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with three re-variations may be used. Further, for example, a plurality of fluctuation patterns may be grouped according to the presence or absence of a predetermined effect such as a pseudo-run or a sliding effect.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, in the case of the 15R probability change hit and the 8R probability change hit, the normal CA3-1 which is the fluctuation pattern type including the fluctuation pattern accompanied only by the normal reach, the normal reach and the pseudo run are used. It is classified into a normal CA3-2 which is a fluctuation pattern type including the accompanying fluctuation pattern, and a super CA3-3 which is a fluctuation pattern type which includes the super reach. In the case of a sudden change big hit, a special CA4-1 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with a reach and a special CA4-2 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with a reach are classified. ing. In the case of a small hit, the type is classified into a special CA4-1 which is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern. In the case of an outlier, the non-reach CA 2-1 is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern without a reach or a predetermined effect, and a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern without a reach but with a predetermined effect. The non-reach CA 2-2, the non-reach CA 2-3 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern of shortened fluctuation without a reach or a predetermined effect, and the normal CA 2-4 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern which includes only a normal reach. And a normal CA2-5 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with a pseudo reach of two times of normal reach and re-variation, and a normal CA2 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with a normal reach and a pseudo run of one re-performation -6 and Super CA2-7, which is a variation pattern type with super reach Are the type divided into.

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether the large hit type determination random number (1) and the normal symbol hit random number (4) are generated by the counter. Count up (1 addition). That is, these are the random numbers for determination, and the other random numbers are the random numbers for display (random 2, random 3) or the random numbers for initial value (random 5). Note that random numbers other than the above-described random numbers may be used in order to enhance the gaming effect. Also, in this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware built in the game control microcomputer 560 (may be hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the big hit determination random number. Note that a software random number may be used as the big hit determination random number instead of a hardware random number.

  FIG. 8A is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit determination table. The big hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a big hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The big hit determination table includes a normal big hit determination table used in a normal state (a game state that is not a probable change state) and a positive change big hit determination table used in a probable change state. Each value described in the left column of FIG. 8A is set in the normal time big hit determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 8A is the big hit determination value.

  In this embodiment, the probability change state is a state in which the state is shifted to a high probability state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the jackpot lottery is increased, and a state in which the state is also shifted to the high base state. There are two cases: a state where the state is shifted only to the state and the state is not shifted to the high base state (the state is a low base state). Uses the probability change big hit determination table, and otherwise uses the normal big hit determination table. As will be described later, in this embodiment, when a 15R probability change hit or an 8R probability change hit occurs, the game is shifted to the high probability state and the high base state after the end of the big hit game. Then, after the end of the big hit, the probable change state and the high base state continue until the change display is finished 70 times. In addition, when the jackpot suddenly changes, the game is shifted to the high probability state without shifting to the high base state after the big hit game ends. Then, after the end of the big hit, the probable change state continues until the change display ends 70 times. Therefore, in this embodiment, after the jackpot of the sudden change jackpot ends, until the 70th variation display is ended, only the high probability state is shifted, and the shift to the high base state is not made (in the low base state). A) There is a case where the state changes.

  FIGS. 8B and 8C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when displaying the variation of the first special symbol, and a small hit determination table used when performing the variation display of the second special symbol. (For the second special symbol). Each numerical value described in FIG. 8B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and is set in FIG. 8C for the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol). Each numerical value described is set. The numerical values described in FIGS. 8B and 8C are the small hit determination values.

  The small hit may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8C may not be provided. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is shifted to the probable change state, the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Even if the game state is shifted to the probable change state, a small hit is generated, and if it is configured to perform an effect that stimulates whether or not the probable change occurs, even if the current game state is the probable change state, On the contrary, it makes the player feel troublesome. Therefore, if the small hit is not generated during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the small hit is less likely to occur when the gaming state is in the probable change state, and the stir effect for the probable change is not performed more than necessary. Can be prevented, and a situation in which the player feels troublesome can be prevented.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the random number for random determination (random R), which is shown in FIG. If any one of the jackpot determination values is matched, it is determined that the special symbol is set to a jackpot (15R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot, sudden probability variable jackpot described later). When the random number for big hit determination matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, it is determined that a small hit is to be made for the special symbol. The “probability” shown in FIG. 8A indicates a probability (ratio) of a big hit. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C indicates the probability (ratio) of a small hit. To determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to shift to a big hit game state, but to determine whether to stop the symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. It is also to decide whether to make a big hit symbol. Determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hitting game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. That is, it is determined whether or not the symbol is a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/300. On the other hand, when the small hit determination table (second special symbol) is used, a case where a small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 13 is started and the first special symbol change display is executed, the second starting winning opening 14 is started and the second special symbol is displayed. As compared with the case where the variable display is executed, the ratio determined as “small hit” is higher.

  FIGS. 8D and 8E are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. FIG. Among these, FIG. 8 (D) determines the type of big hit using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening 13 (that is, when the first special symbol change display is performed). It is a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a in the case. FIG. 8 (E) shows a case where the big hit type is determined by using the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Is a big hit type determination table (for a second special symbol) 131b.

  The big hit type determination tables 131a and 131b indicate that when the variable display result is determined to be a big hit symbol, the type of the big hit is set to "15R certain variable big hit" based on the random number (random 1) for the big hit type determination. It is a table that is referred to for determining one of “8R probability change big hit” and “sudden probability change big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, ten determination values are assigned to “suddenly probable big hit” in the big hit type determination table 131a (40 minutes). 5 is assigned to the jackpot type determination table 131b in the jackpot type determination table 131b (the ratio of 5/40). Will be suddenly determined as a jackpot). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first start winning opening 13 is started and the first special symbol change display is executed, the second starting winning opening 14 is started and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared to the case where the variable display is executed, the ratio of being determined to be “suddenly variable jackpot” is higher. In addition, "sudden probability change big hit" is allocated only to the big hit type determination table 131a for the first special symbol, and "sudden probability change big hit" is not allocated to the big hit type determination table 131b for the second special symbol (ie, Only when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, it may be determined that "suddenly variable big hit".)

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), a sudden probability change big hit as a first specific game state in which a predetermined amount of game value is provided, and an amount larger than the game value. As the second specific game state for providing the game value, there is a case where the 15-point probability change big hit "15R probability change big hit" and the 8 round probability change big hit "8R probability change big hit" are determined, and the change display of the first special symbol is performed. Although a case is shown where it is determined that the first specific game state is set at a high rate when the game is executed, the provided game value is not limited to the number of rounds as shown in this embodiment. For example, as compared with the first specific game state, the second specific game state in which the permissible amount of the winning number (count number) of game balls to the special winning opening per round is increased as a game value is determined. Is also good. Further, for example, as compared with the first specific game state, a second specific game state may be determined in which the opening time of the special winning opening per game during the big hit is extended as a game value. Further, for example, even in the same 15 rounds of big hits, a first specific game state in which the big winning opening is opened once per round and a second specific gaming state in which the big winning opening is opened plural times per round are set. It may be prepared to increase the game value in the second specific game state by substantially increasing the number of times the special winning opening is opened. In this case, for example, in any of the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state, when the special winning opening is opened 15 times (in this case, in the case of the first specific gaming state, all 15 rounds are opened). Is terminated, and in the case of the second specific game state, unfinished rounds remain), and an effect may be executed in such a manner as to stimulate whether or not the big hit continues. Then, in the case of the first specific game state, all the 15 rounds have been internally completed, so the jackpot game is ended, and in the case of the second specific game state, an uncompleted round remains internally. For this reason, the big hit game may be continued (an effect in which the opening of the big winning opening is additionally started with a bonus after the big hit of opening 15 times is completed).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, the big hit types include "15R certain variable big hit", "8R certain variable big hit", and "sudden positive variable big hit". In this embodiment, the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is three, that is, 15 rounds, 8 rounds and 2 rounds. However, the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is It is not limited to the form shown. For example, there may be provided a 7R certain-variable big hit for controlling a 7-round big hit game or a 5R certain-variable big hit for controlling a 5-round big hit game. Also, in this embodiment, the case where the jackpot types are three types of “15R probability variable hit”, “8R probability variable hit” and “sudden probability variable hit” is shown, but not limited to three types, for example, four types The above jackpot types may be provided. Conversely, the number of big hit types may be less than three, for example, only two big hit types may be provided.

  The "15R probable big hit" is a big hit in which the game is controlled to the big hit game state of 15 rounds and is shifted to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game state. The state is also shifted to (see steps S166 to S170 described later). Then, after the transition to the probable change state, when the fluctuation display is finished 70 times, the high base state and the high probability state end (see steps S168, S144, steps S170, S140).

  The “8R probable big hit” is a big hit in which the game is controlled to the big hit game state of 8 rounds and the game is shifted to the probable change state after the end of the big hit game state. The state is also shifted to (see steps S166 to S170 described later). Then, after the transition to the probable change state, when the fluctuation display is finished 70 times, the high base state and the high probability state end (see steps S168, S144, steps S170, S140).

  In addition, the “sudden probability change big hit” is the number of times the large winning opening is released less than “15R probability change big hit” or “8R probability change big hit” (in this embodiment, two times of opening for 0.1 second). It is a permissible jackpot. In other words, when "suddenly changing probability big hit" is achieved, the state is controlled to the two round big hit gaming state. In addition, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is as long as 29 seconds in “15R probability changing big hit” and “8R probability changing big hit”, whereas the large winning opening per round is large in “sudden probability changing big hit”. The opening time is as short as 0.1 second, and it is almost impossible to expect a game ball to win a big winning opening during a big hit game. Then, in this embodiment, the game is shifted to the probability change state after the sudden change probability jackpot game state is terminated (in this embodiment, the game is shifted to only the high probability state without shifting to the high base state). Then, after the transition to the probable change state, when the fluctuation display is completed 70 times, the high probability state ends.

  As described above, in this embodiment, even when the "small hit" occurs, the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 second each time, and the big hit gaming state by the "sudden probability change big hit" is set. Similar control is performed. Then, in the case of "small hit", the game state does not change and the game state before the "small hit" is maintained after the opening of the special winning opening twice. By doing so, it is impossible to recognize whether it is "suddenly changing big hit" or "small hit", and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, as shown in this embodiment, in the case where the big hit types are all the probability changing big hits (in this embodiment, 15R probability changing big hits, 8R probability changing big hits, sudden probability changing big hits), even if the small hits are not provided. Good. Further, in the case where a small hit is provided when all of the big hit types are probable big hits as in this embodiment, a sudden probable big hit which is only shifted to the high probability state and does not accompany the high base state is performed. It is preferable to provide them (the opening pattern of the special winning opening is also the same in the case of suddenly changing big hit and small hit).

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with the value of random 1, and are the determination values (the jackpot type) corresponding to “15R probable big hit”, “8R probable big hit”, and “sudden probable big hit”, respectively. Judgment value) is set. When the value of Random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the type of the jackpot as a type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  In this embodiment, as described above, only the big hit type that shifts to the high-probability state is provided. However, a big hit that does not shift to the high-probability state (a so-called normal big hit) may be provided. Further, when the state is shifted to the high-probability state, the high-probability state is terminated by shifting to the normal state in response to performing the variable display a predetermined number of times. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the high-probability state is terminated by setting the state to a normal state upon occurrence of a normal jackpot without limiting the number of times.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to make a transition to the probable change state based on the type of the big hit that has occurred, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a specific area through which a game ball can pass is provided in the special winning opening, and when a game ball passes through the specific area during a big hit, the game state shifts to a positive change state, while the game ball passes through the specific area during a big hit. May be changed to a normal state when does not pass through. In that case, by changing the ease of passing of the game ball to the specific area according to the type of the big hit, a substantial probability-change big hit and a non-probability-variable big hit may be realized. For example, the ease of passing a game ball to a specific area may be changed by making the opening time of the special winning opening different depending on the type of big hit. Specifically, a jackpot type in which the opening time of the special winning opening is long is set as a large hit (substantially variable big hit) in which the game ball easily passes to the specific area, and a large hit type in which the opening time of the special winning opening is short is played in the specific area. It may be a big hit (substantial non-probable variable hit) where the ball is difficult to pass.

  In the present embodiment, when the 15R probability variable hit or the 8R probability variable hit occurs, the state shifts to the high probability state and the high base state. Although the configuration is ended, the number of times of the variable display from the transition to each game state to the end may not be the same in the high probability state and the high base state. For example, the high-base state may be ended when the variable display is completed 70 times after the end of the big hit, and the high-probability state may be ended when the variable display is completed 71 times.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a probability change big hit occurs suddenly, the state shifts to the high probability state only without changing to the high base state after the end of the big hit, but is not limited to this. As in the case of the occurrence of the probability variation big hit, the transition to the probability variation state and the high base state may be performed. Further, it may be determined whether or not to shift to the high base state based on the gaming state when the probability change big hit occurs suddenly. For example, if a probable variable jackpot suddenly occurs in the high base state, the state shifts to the high base state. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize which of the hits has occurred.

  FIGS. 9A to 9C are explanatory diagrams showing the large hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C. The large hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C are used to change the variation pattern type according to the large hit type determination result and the random number for the variation pattern type determination when the variable display result is determined to be a big hit symbol. It is a table that is referenced to determine one of a plurality of types based on (random 2).

  Each of the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 2) for the variation pattern type determination, and includes normal CA3-1, normal CA3-2, A determination value corresponding to one of the fluctuation pattern types of the super CA3-3, the special CA4-1, and the special CA4-2 is set.

  For example, the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 9A used when the jackpot type is “8R probable big hit”, and FIG. 9 ( The assignment of the determination value to the variation pattern type of the normal CA3-1, the normal CA3-2, and the super CA3-3 is different from the large hit variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in B).

  As described above, when comparing the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the jackpot type, the assignment of the determination value to each variation pattern type differs depending on the jackpot type. Further, a determination value is assigned to a different variation pattern type depending on the big hit type. Therefore, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types according to the result of determining which of the plurality of types is the jackpot type, and it is possible to vary the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type.

  As shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, in the present embodiment, when “15R probable big hit” or “8R probable big hit”, a random number for random pattern type determination (random 2) Is between 150 and 251, it can be understood that the variable display accompanied by at least the super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed.

  In addition, for the super reach jackpot, the fluctuation pattern type with pseudo run (variable pattern type including the fluctuation pattern of super PA3-3 and super PA3-4) and the fluctuation pattern type without pseudo run (super PB3-3, super (Variation pattern type including the variation pattern of PB3-4). In this case, in both the large hit variation pattern type determination table 132A for the 8R probability variable big hit and the large hit variation pattern type determination table 132B for the 15R probability big hit, A fluctuation pattern type without a run is assigned.

  Also, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table 132C used when the jackpot type is “suddenly probable big hit”, for example, when the big hit types such as special CA4-1 and special CA4-2 are other than “suddenly probable big hit” A determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type to which no determination value is assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is controlled to be "big hit" and the big hit type is set to "suddenly changed big hit", when the suddenly changed big hit state is controlled, the case where the control is performed to the big hit state by the 15R definitely changed big hit or the 8R certain big hit is performed. Can be determined for different variation pattern types.

  FIG. 9D is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D displays a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for the variation pattern type determination when the variable display result is determined to be a small hit symbol. Is a table that is referenced to determine one of the following. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9 (D), a case where the special CA4-1 is determined as the variation pattern type when the small hit is determined. .

  FIGS. 10A to 10D are explanatory diagrams showing outlier variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135D. Among them, FIG. 10 (A) shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than 3. FIG. 10B shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135B that is used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is three or more. FIG. 10 (C) shows a high probability / high base state of the gaming state in the probability changing state (a state from the end of the big hit by the 15R probability changing big hit or the 8R probability changing big hit to the end of the 70th variation display). 14 shows a loss pattern type determination table 135C used in the case. FIG. 10D is used when the gaming state is the high probability / low base state of the probability change state (the state from the end of the big hit due to the sudden change big hit to the end of the 70th variation display). An outlier variation pattern type determination table 135D is shown. The outlier variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135D indicate that when a variable display result is determined to be an outlier symbol, a plurality of variation pattern types are determined based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination. Is a table that is referred to to determine one of the following.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 (C) and 10 (D), in this embodiment, even if the state is the probable change state, when the fluctuation display after the end of the big hit due to the sudden change big hit is performed, the 15R certain change big hit is performed. As compared with the case where the fluctuation display after the end of the big hit due to the 8R likelihood change big hit is performed, the ratio at which the fluctuation pattern with super reach is selected is higher. By doing so, in this embodiment, in the high-probability state after the end of the big hit due to the sudden change big hit, the fluctuation display of the super reach is performed with a high probability, thereby enabling the player to be in the high-probability state. The expectation of is increasing.

  In addition, by increasing the ratio of the super reach from the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times before the end of the probable change state (for example, five times before) to the last fluctuation display, a game for a big hit immediately before the end of the probable change state is achieved. It is good also as raising expectation of the person. In this case, for example, at the end of the big hit, 75 times are set to a high probability number counter and a high base number counter described later (for example, 75 is set to both the high probability number counter and the high base number counter, and 75 times is set). The high-probability / high-base state may be continued until the fluctuation display is finished. The high-probability-number counter is set to 75, the high-base-number counter is set to 70, and the five-variation in which the probable change state ends is set. The control may be controlled to the high probability / low base state from the previous to the last change display, and the control may be performed to the high probability / low base state from 5 changes before the end of the probable change state to the last change display. In this case, according to the same control as that shown in the present embodiment, by confirming the high probability flag and the high base flag, it is possible to determine the variation pattern type for outliers. Table 135C or 135D may be selected (see steps S95, S96, S100, and S101). At the start of the variable display, the value of the high probability number counter or the high base number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 5). ) Is checked (whether the remaining number of times of the probable change state is within a predetermined number of times). If the number is within a predetermined number (for example, 5), the superimposed state shown in FIG. The outlier variation pattern type determination table 135D having the increased reach ratio is selected, and if the counter value is still larger than a predetermined number (for example, 5), the outlier variation pattern type determination table 135C shown in FIG. May be selected. The control method in the case of increasing the ratio of the super reach from the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times before the probable change state ends (for example, five times before) is not limited to that described in this embodiment. For example, by setting 71 in the high-probability counter in the same manner as in this embodiment, and setting 66 in the high-base counter, conversely, from the 5th change before the probable change state ends to the last change display. Is controlled to a high-probability / low-base state, and by checking whether or not the value of the high-probability counter is less than or equal to 5, the outlier variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D are selected. You may. Also, the number of changes after the big hit may not be determined based on the count value of the high probability number counter or the high base number counter, but may be determined using another counter. For example, a counter for counting the number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game is provided, and it is determined whether the count value of the counter is within a predetermined range (for example, 71 to 75 or 66 to 71). A determination may be made as to whether or not the state is between five fluctuations before the end of the state and the last fluctuation display, and the loss fluctuation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D may be selected. Further, when the control is performed such that the high-probability / low-base state is controlled from the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times before the end of the probable change state (for example, five times before) to the end of the last fluctuation display. In the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D for loss may be selected according to the state of the high probability flag and the high base flag in the variation pattern setting process (see steps S95, S96, S100, and S101). ).

  Note that the example shown in FIG. 10 illustrates a case where separate variation pattern type determination tables 135B to 135D are used for the case where the gaming state is the high base state and the case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. However, a configuration may be adopted in which a common out-of-off variation pattern type determination table is used in the case of the high base state and the case where the total number of pending storages is three or more. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 10C, a case is shown in which the common high-base out-of-offset variation pattern type determination table 135C is used regardless of the total number of pending storages. As the type determination table, a plurality of outlier variation pattern determination tables (tables having different ratios of determination values) according to the total number of storages held may be used.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the outlier fluctuation pattern type determination table 135A used when the total number of reserved storages is less than 3, and when the total number of reserved storages is 3 or more. The table shows a case where two types of tables are used, i.e., a deviation variation pattern type determination table 135B, but the method of dividing the deviation variation pattern type determination table is not limited to the method described in this embodiment. For example, a separate outfall variation pattern type determination table may be provided for each value of the total number of pending storages (that is, for zero total pending storage, one total pending storage, and two total pending storages). , For three total pending storages, four total pending storages,... May be used separately. Further, for example, a loss variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of values other than the total number of stored suspensions may be used. For example, an out-of-change variation pattern type determination table for the total number of pending storages 0 to 2, for the total number of pending storages 3 and for the total number of pending storages 4 may be used.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a plurality of outlier variation pattern type determination tables are provided in accordance with the total number of pending storages. A plurality of tables may be provided. For example, when performing the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, a loss fluctuation pattern type determination table separately prepared for each value of the first reserved storage number may be used (that is, the first reserved storage number). The outlier variation pattern type determination table for 0, the first first storage number, the first first storage number 2, the first first storage number 3, the first first storage number 4, etc. Each may be used separately). Further, for example, a loss variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the first reserved storage number may be used. For example, an outlier variation pattern type determination table for the first reserved storage number 0-2, the first reserved storage number 3, the first reserved storage number 4, etc. may be used. Even in this case, when the number of first hold storages or the number of second hold storages is large (for example, 3 or more), a configuration may be adopted such that a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected. . Further, even in such a case, a configuration may be adopted in which a common determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern accompanied by super reach as a specific variable display pattern.

  The “specific production mode” refers to a variation pattern type and a variation pattern in which at least the degree of expectation for a big hit is set to be high, such as a change pattern with a super reach, so that the player can have a sense of expectation for the big hit. It is. Further, the “degree of expectation (reliability) with respect to the big hit” indicates an appearance rate (probability) at which a big hit appears when a variable display (for example, a variable display with super reach) is executed according to the specific effect mode. ing. For example, the jackpot expectation degree when the variable display with super reach is executed is determined as (percentage of super reach executed when the jackpot is determined) / (when the jackpot is determined and lost). The rate at which super reach is performed in both cases is determined by calculating.

  In each of the variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135B, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a value of a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination, and non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2- 3, a determination value corresponding to one of the fluctuation pattern types of normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6 and super CA2-7 is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 (A) and 10 (B), in this embodiment, when the game state is normal and the game state is normal, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is determined. Is 230 to 251, it can be understood that a variable display accompanied by at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed regardless of the total number of reserved storages.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, when the game state is normal and the game state is normal, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is determined. Is from 1 to 79, it can be understood that the fluctuation display of the normal fluctuation that does not involve at least the reach (and does not accompany the predetermined effect such as the pseudo-run or the slide effect) is executed irrespective of the total number of reserved storages. With such a table configuration, in the present embodiment, the determination tables (outlier variation pattern type determination tables 135A and 135B) include at least one of the variable display patterns other than the variable display pattern for reach (the variation pattern with reach). Regarding a part, regardless of the number of rights (the first number of reserved storages, the number of second reserved storages, and the total number of reserved storages) stored in the reserved storage means (the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer), The configuration is such that a common determination value (1 to 79 in the examples shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B) is assigned. The “variable display pattern other than the reach variable display pattern” refers to, for example, a variable display result without a reach, without a predetermined effect such as a pseudo-run or a sliding effect, as described in this embodiment. Is a variable display pattern (fluctuation pattern) used when a big hit does not occur.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the case where the common jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table is used regardless of the current game state is shown. Depending on whether the state is the normal state, a large hit variation pattern type determination table prepared separately may be used. Further, in this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is three or more, the variation pattern for shortening variation is selected by selecting the variation pattern type determination table for shortening shown in FIG. 10B. Although a case is shown where there is a case, the total number of reserved storages (the first reserved storage number or the second reserved storage number may be used) when the variation pattern of the shortened variation can be selected according to the current game state. ) May be different. For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the total number of reserved storages is three (or, for example, when the first reserved storage number or the second reserved storage number is two), the shortening is performed. The variation pattern type determination table for outliers is selected so that the variation pattern of the shortened variation is determined in some cases. When the gaming state is the high base state, the total number of stored suspensions is 1 or 2, which is smaller. However, (or, for example, even when the first reserved storage number or the second reserved storage number is smaller than 0 or 1), the variation pattern of the shortened variation is determined by selecting the variation pattern type determination table for shortening. In some cases.

  FIGS. 11A and 11B are explanatory diagrams showing the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B are used to determine the variation pattern when the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small hit”, according to the determination result of the big hit type or the variation pattern type. Is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern to one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 3) for use. Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is selected as a use table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit fluctuation pattern determination table 137A is selected as a use table in accordance with the determination result that the fluctuation pattern type is one of the normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and the super CA3-3, and the fluctuation pattern type is specially set. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the use table according to the result of the decision to use either CA4-1 or special CA4-2. Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type. It includes data (judgment value) corresponding to one of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of "big hit".

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 11A, as the variation pattern types, a normal CA 3-1 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a normal reach and a pseudo run are included. A case where the type is classified into a certain normal CA 3-2 and a super CA 3-3 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern accompanied by super reach (sometimes accompanied by pseudo run with super reach) is shown. In the example shown in FIG. 11B, as the variation pattern types, a special CA4-1 which is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern, and a special CA4-1 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern accompanied by a reach. 2 is shown. In FIG. 11B, the variation pattern types may be divided according to the presence / absence of a predetermined effect such as a pseudo-run or a slide effect, instead of being divided according to the presence / absence of a reach. In this case, for example, the special CA 4-1 includes the special PG1-1 and the special PG2-1 which are the fluctuation patterns not accompanied by the predetermined effect, and the special CA4-2 includes the special PG1-2 and the special PG1-2 with the predetermined effect. It may be configured to include PG1-3 and special PG2-2.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A stored in the ROM 54. When the variable display result is determined to be “out”, the outlier variation pattern determination table 138A, based on the determination result of the variation pattern type, is based on a random number for random variation determination (random 3). It is a table referred to in order to determine a variation pattern to any of a plurality of types. The outlier variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a use table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  13 and 14 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the examples shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of an effect symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. ) (Each corresponds to the variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIG. 6, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by that number. Note that “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. Further, the effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of fluctuation. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 100, when receiving the command 80XX (H), controls the effect display device 9 to start the variable display of effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether to make a big hit, whether to make a small hit, and a big hit type. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display results of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H), and thus the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

  The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol change designation command) indicating that variable display (change) of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specification command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is ended and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the symbol confirmation designation command, it ends variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure restoration designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is restarted. When power is supplied to the gaming machine, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, otherwise, the initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  The command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A001 and A002 (H) are display control commands for displaying a fanfare screen, that is, for starting a big hit game (big hit start specifying command: fanfare specifying command). In this embodiment, a big hit start specifying command or a small hit / suddenly variable big hit start specifying command is used depending on the type of big hit. Specifically, in the case of "15R probability variable hit" or "8R probability variable hit", the big hit start designation command (A001 (H)) is used, and in the case of "sudden probability variable hit" or "small hit". Is a small hit / suddenly variable big hit start designation command (A002 (H)). Note that the game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit a fanfare designation command for designating the start of a sudden change jackpot when sudden change is a big hit, but not to send a fanfare designation command for small hit. Is also good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (specifying command during opening of the special winning opening) indicating that the special winning opening is open at the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data and transmitted for each round, the special winning opening opening designation command that is different for each round is transmitted. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game, Transmits a special winning opening opening command (A10A (H)) for specifying round 10. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (specifying command after opening the special winning opening) indicating the closing of the special winning opening at the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data and transmitted for each round in the special winning opening specification command, the different special winning opening specification command is transmitted for each round. For example, when ending the first round during the jackpot game, a command (A201 (H)) after opening the special winning opening that specifies round 1 is transmitted, and when ending the tenth round during the jackpot game. Transmits a special winning opening specification command (A20A (H)) for specifying round 10.

  The command A301 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the big hit end screen, that is, for specifying the end of the big hit game (big hit end specifying command: ending 1 specifying command). The big hit end designation command (A301 (H)) is used to end a big hit game with "15R certain big hit" or "8R certain big hit". The command A302 (H) is an effect control command for designating the end of the small hit game or the end of the sudden change big hit game (small hit / sudden change probability big hit end designation command: Ending 2 designation command). Note that the game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit an ending designation command for sudden change big hit end designation when sudden change is a big hit, but not to send an ending designation command for small hit. Is also good.

  The command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the normal state. The command B001 (H) is an effect control command (high probability / high base state background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the high probability / high base state. The command B002 (H) is an effect control command (high probability / low base state background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the high probability / low base state.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first start winning designation command) for designating that there is a first start winning. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second start winning designation command) for designating that there is a second start winning. In this embodiment, hereinafter, the first start winning designation command and the second start winning designation command may be collectively referred to as a start winning designation command.

  The command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (combined reserved storage number designation command) for designating the total number (the combined reserved storage number) that is the sum of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number. “XX” in the command C2XX (H) indicates the total number of reserved storages. Command C300 (H) is an effect control command (subtraction total storage number subtraction designation command) for specifying that the total number of pending storages is to be subtracted by one. In this embodiment, the microcomputer 560 for game control transmits the command for subtracting the total number of reserved storages when subtracting the total number of reserved storages, but does not use the total number of reserved storages subtraction designation command. When subtracting the total number of reserved storages, a command for specifying the total number of reserved storages after subtraction may be transmitted.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which a command for specifying the total number of reserved storages is transmitted as a command for specifying the total number of reserved storages. May be configured to transmit a command designating the increased number of pending storages. Specifically, when the first reserved storage increases, a first reserved storage number designation command for designating the first reserved storage number is transmitted, and when the second reserved storage increases, the second reserved storage number is designated. The second reserved storage number designation command may be transmitted.

  Further, in this embodiment, a start winning designation command for designating which one of the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 has won a start is transmitted as the hold storage information, Is transmitted, the effect control command transmitted as the pending storage information is not limited to the one described in the present embodiment. For example, when the number of reserved storages increases, the reserved storage number addition designation command (the first reserved storage number addition designation command or the second reserved storage number addition command) indicating that the first reserved storage number or the second reserved storage number has increased. While transmitting the designated command, while the reserved storage number decreases, the reserved storage number subtraction designation command (first reserved storage number subtraction command or the first reserved storage number subtraction command) indicating that the first reserved storage number or the second reserved storage number has decreased. A second reserved storage number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

  The command C4XX (H) and the command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (winning-time determination result designation command) indicating the content of the winning-time determination result. Among them, the command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (symbol designating command) indicating the result of the determination of the type of a big hit, whether or not a big hit, a small hit, among the winning determination results. is there. The command C6XX (H) is an effect control command indicating a determination result (determination result of the variation pattern type) as to which of the determination value ranges of the variation pattern type determination random number is included in the prize-winning determination results. (Fluctuation category command).

  In this embodiment, in a prize-winning effect process (see FIG. 21) described later, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not a big hit, a small hit or not, and a big hit at the time of starting prize. Then, it is determined which of the determination values the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type falls within. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value for designating a big hit or a small hit or a value for designating a big hit type is set, and control for transmitting to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Further, a value for designating a range of the determination value as the determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control for transmitting to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether the display result is a big hit or a small hit, and recognize the type of the big hit based on the value set in the symbol designating command. Based on the fluctuation category command, if the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is a predetermined judgment value, the fluctuation pattern type can be recognized.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the symbol designation command. As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, EXT data is set according to whether a big hit or a small hit and the type of the big hit, and a symbol designating command is transmitted.

  For example, if it is determined in the prize-winning effect processing that will be described below that it is “out of place”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 1 designation command) in which EXT data is set to “00 (H)”. Further, for example, when it is determined to be “15R probable big hit”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 2 designation command) in which EXT data is set to “01 (H)”. Further, for example, when it is determined that “8R probable big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 3 designation command) in which EXT data is set to “02 (H)”. Further, for example, when it is determined to be “suddenly probable big hit”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 5 designation command) in which EXT data is set to “04 (H)”. Further, for example, when it is determined to be “small hit”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 6 designation command) in which EXT data is set to “05 (H)”. The EXT data set in the symbol designation command and the EXT data set in the display result designation command may be shared. With such a configuration, the data to be read can be shared when setting the symbol designation command and when setting the display result designation command.

  FIG. 16 and FIG. 17 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the variable category command. As shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, in this embodiment, which game state, which display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is displayed, and the random number for determining the variation pattern type at the time of the start winning. The value is set in the EXT data according to which of the determination values is determined to be within the range of the determination value, and the fluctuation category command is transmitted.

  For example, when it is determined that the gaming state is a normal state and a loss at the time of the start winning, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 1 to 79 in step S232 of the winning effect production process described later. Determine whether or not. If the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 79, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 1 command in which EXT data is set to “00 (H)”. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 2-1 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 1 to 79 regardless of the total number of stored storages. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the fluctuation pattern type is the non-reach CA 2-1 based on the reception of the fluctuation category 1 command. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 89, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 2 command in which EXT data is set to “01 (H)”. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 90 to 99, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 3 command in which EXT data is set to “02 (H)”. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 100 to 169, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 4 command in which EXT data is set to “03 (H)”. Next, when the value of the random number for determining a variation pattern type is 170 to 199, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 5 command in which EXT data is set to “04 (H)”. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 200 to 214, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 6 command in which EXT data is set to “05 (H)”. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 215 to 229, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 7 command in which EXT data is set to “06 (H)”. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 230 to 251, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 8 command in which “07 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the super CA2-7 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 regardless of the total number of pending storages. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the variation pattern type is at least the super CA2-7 based on the reception of the variation category 8 command.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the game state is the normal state, any one of the normal CA2-5 and the normal CA2-6 is changed in the range of the determination values 215 to 229 regardless of the total number of reserved storages. Since the pattern type is assigned, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the variation pattern type is at least one of the normal CA2-5 and the normal CA2-6 based on the reception of the variation category 7 command. Can be recognized. As shown in FIG. 12, when the variation pattern type is normal CA2-5, normal PB2-2 is always selected as the variation pattern. On the other hand, when the variation pattern type is normal CA2-6. Since the normal PB2-1 is always selected as the fluctuation pattern, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines that the fluctuation pattern with the pseudo-run is selected based on the reception of the fluctuation category 7 command. Can be recognized.

  The thresholds 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 used to determine which of the above-mentioned fluctuation categories belong to are specifically shown in FIGS. 10 (A) and 10 (B). It is derived by picking up a value that can be a boundary of the range of the determination value assigned to each variation pattern type in the outlier variation pattern type determination table. The same applies to the following fluctuation categories 9 to 12 and 21 to 29. Each fluctuation category in the fluctuation pattern type determination tables shown in FIGS. 9A to 9D and FIGS. A value that can be a boundary of the range of the determination value assigned to the pattern type is picked up, and a threshold value used for category determination is derived.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in the high probability / high base state and loses at the time of the start winning, the CPU 56 first sets the value of the variation pattern type determination random number in step S232 of the winning effect production process described later. It is determined whether the number is 1 to 219. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 219 (that is, when the variation pattern type is the non-reach CA 2-3), the CPU 56 sets the variation in which the EXT data is set to “08 (H)”. Send a category 9 command. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 220 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is Super CA2-7), the CPU 56 sets “09 (H)” in the EXT data. A variable category 10 command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in the high probability / low base state and out of the game at the time of the start winning, the CPU 56 first sets the value of the variation pattern type determination random number in step S232 of the at-winning-time production process described later. It is determined whether it is 1 to 79 or not. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is the non-reach CA 2-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation in which the EXT data is set to “0A (H)”. Send a category 11 command. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 80 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is Super CA2-7), the CPU 56 sets “0B (H)” in the EXT data. Send the fluctuation category 12 command.

  In addition, even when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability / high base state or high probability / low base state), the variation pattern type of the super CA2-7 may be assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251. Good. By doing so, a common determination value can be assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 regardless of the gaming state. Therefore, when executing the processing of step S232 of the processing of the prize-winning effect described later, if it is a loss, the common determination processing may be performed regardless of the gaming state, and the program capacity can be further reduced. In this case, the process of determining the game state in step S226 can be omitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that “8R probable big hit” occurs at the time of the start winning, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the random number for fluctuation pattern type determination is 1 to 74 in step S232 of the winning effect production process described later. Determine whether or not. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 74 (that is, when the variation pattern type is the normal CA 3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which EXT data is set to “10 (H)”. 21 command is transmitted. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 75 to 149 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2), the CPU 56 sets “11 (H)” in the EXT data. A change category 22 command is transmitted. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 150 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is Super CA3-3), the CPU 56 sets “12 (H)” in the EXT data. A variable category 23 command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that “15R probable big hit” is obtained at the time of the start winning, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 1 to 38 in step S232 of the winning effect production process described later. Determine whether or not. If the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 38 (that is, if the variation pattern type is the normal CA 3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which EXT data is set to “13 (H)”. 24 command is transmitted. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 39 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is the normal CA3-2), the CPU 56 sets “14 (H)” in the EXT data. A fluctuation category 25 command is transmitted. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is Super CA3-3), the CPU 56 sets “15 (H)” in the EXT data. A fluctuation category 26 command is transmitted.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2, normal PB2-3 or normal PB2-4 is selected as the variation pattern. The effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the fluctuation pattern with the pseudo run is selected based on the reception of the fluctuation category 22 command or the fluctuation category 25 command.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a probability change big hit suddenly occurs at the time of the start winning, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 100 in step S232 of the winning effect production process described later. Is determined. If the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 100 (that is, if the variation pattern type is special CA4-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which EXT data is set to “16 (H)”. 27 command is transmitted. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 101 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is the special CA 4-2), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which EXT data is set to “17 (H)”. 28 command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a small hit occurs at the time of the start winning, the CPU 56 transmits a fluctuation category 29 command in which “18 (H)” is set in the EXT data.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, according to the contents shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the display state of the image display device 9 is changed, the display state of the lamp is changed, and sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. I do.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol every time a special winning symbol is displayed on the first special symbol indicator 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b due to a winning start. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a two-byte configuration, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of EXT data is always set to “0”. Such a command form is an example, and another command form may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  As a method of transmitting the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 one byte at a time by eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7. In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-like (rectangular wave) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing the capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a process of fetching 1-byte data by an interrupt process.

  In the examples shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the variation pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed on the first special symbol display 8a in the variable display (fluctuation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. An image display that can be used in common with the variable display (fluctuation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol on the symbol indicator 8b, and performs the effect in conjunction with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When controlling the effect parts such as the device 9, it is possible not to increase the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of a program for the special symbol process (step S26) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process processing, processing for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process process, if the first starting port switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first starting winning port 13 is turned on, that is, the starting to the first starting winning port 13 is performed. If a winning has occurred, or if the second starting switch 14a for detecting that a game ball has won the second starting winning port 14 has been turned on, that is, the starting winning to the second starting winning port 14. If the error has occurred, the start port switch passing process is executed (steps S311 and S312). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not on, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processing in steps S300 to S310 is as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 560 is ready to start the variable display of the special symbol, the microcomputer 560 checks the number of stored numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer (the total number of hold storage). The number of stored numeric data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. If the count value of the total reserved storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In the case of a big hit, a big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The big hit flag is reset when the big hit game ends.

  Variation pattern setting processing (step S301): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, a fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) in the fluctuation pattern is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do so. In addition, control is performed to transmit a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100, and a fluctuation time timer for measuring the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission processing (step S302): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol change processing (step S303): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting process has elapsed (the fluctuation time timer set in step S301 has timed out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer has become 0), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol. Control for transmitting the designated command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the fourth symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560.

  Special symbol stop processing (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300. In this embodiment, based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag has become 4, a special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process will be described later. The data is set in the output buffer for setting special symbol display control data, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed in the display control process of step S22 according to the setting content of the output buffer.

  Big winning opening pre-processing (step S305): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the special winning opening opening pre-processing, control for opening the special winning opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter for counting the number of game balls entering the special winning opening) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. In addition, while performing control to transmit the special winning opening opening command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the execution time of the special winning opening processing is set by a timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set in step S306. (In this example, 6). Note that the pre-winning opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process is also a process of starting a big hit game. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data and transmitted for each round, the special winning opening opening designation command that is different for each round is transmitted. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game, Transmits a special winning opening opening command (A10A (H)) for specifying round 10.

  Big winning opening process (step S306): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the processing during opening of the special winning opening, processing for confirming establishment of a closing condition of the special winning opening is performed. If the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and there is still a remaining round, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. In addition, while performing control to transmit the designation command after opening during the big hit to the effect control microcomputer 100, and when all rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to the value corresponding to step S307 (this In the example, it is updated to 7).

  Big hit end processing (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Further, a process of setting a flag (for example, a high probability flag or a high base flag) indicating a game state is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit opening pre-processing (step S308): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the small hit opening pre-processing, control for opening the big winning opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter for counting the number of game balls entering the special winning opening) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. The execution time of the special winning opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (9 in this example) corresponding to step S309. Note that the small hit opening pre-processing is executed every time the big winning opening during the small hit game is opened. It is also a process to start.

  Small hit opening processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Processing for confirming establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening is performed. If the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and the number of opening of the special winning opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. Update. When all the openings have been completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S310.

  Small hit end processing (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hitting game state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the starting port switch passage processing in step S312. In the starting port switch passage processing, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the first starting port switch 13a is on (step S1211). If the first starting port switch 13a is not on, the process proceeds to step S1222. If the first start port switch 13a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first reserved storage for counting the first reserved storage number). It is checked whether the value of the number counter is 4) (step S1212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process moves to step S1222.

  If the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increments the value of the first reserved storage number counter by 1 (step S1213), and increases the value of the total reserved storage number counter for counting the total reserved storage number. Is incremented by 1 (step S1214). Further, the CPU 56 corresponds to the value of the total reserved storage number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (reserved specific area) for storing the order of winning into the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Data indicating “first” is set in the area (step S1215).

  In this embodiment, when the first starting port switch 13a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts to win in the first starting winning port 13), data indicating "first" is set, When the second starting port switch 14a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts to win in the second starting winning port 14), data indicating "second" is set. For example, the CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data indicating "first" when the first starting port switch 13a is turned on in the hold storage specifying information storage area (hold hold specific area), When the second starting port switch 14a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating "second". In this case, if there is no corresponding hold storage, 00 (H) is set in the hold storage specifying information storage area (hold hold specific area).

  FIG. 20A is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration example of a reserved storage specific information storage area (reserved specific area). As shown in FIG. 20A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total pending storage counter is secured in the reserved specific area. FIG. 20A shows an example in which the value of the total pending storage number counter is 5. As shown in FIG. 20A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total number of held storage counters is secured in the reserved specific area, and the first start winning port 13 or the first winning port 13 is reserved. Based on the winning in the second starting winning port 14, data indicating "first" or "second" in the winning order is set. Accordingly, the order of winning the first start winning port 13 and the second starting winning port 14 is stored in the hold storage specific information storage area (hold specific area). The reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating a software random number and storing them in a storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 20B). Step S1216). In the process of step S1216, a random number R (a big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (a random number 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (a random number 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. In addition, instead of extracting the fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 3) in the starting opening switch passing process (at the time of starting winning) and storing it in the storage area in advance, the random number is extracted at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  FIG. 20B is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration example of an area (hold buffer) for storing a random number or the like corresponding to hold storage. As shown in FIG. 20 (B), a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In the second reserved storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second reserved storage number is secured. In this embodiment, the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer include a random R (hard hit determination random number) as a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) as a software random number, A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. Note that the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a prize-winning effect process in which the fluctuation display result and the fluctuation pattern type when the fluctuation based on the detected start prize is subsequently executed are determined at the time of the start prize (step S1217). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect effect process (step S1218), and transmits a variable category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. The control is performed (step S1219). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1220), and sets the value of the total pending storage number counter to EXT data to set the total pending storage number designation command. Is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1221).

  By executing the processing of steps S1218 and S1219, in this embodiment, regardless of the game state (whether the state is the high probability state or the high base state, or the state of the big hit game), the CPU 56 Always sends both the symbol designating command and the variable category command to the effect control microcomputer 100 every time the first winning entry 13 is started.

  Further, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S1218 to S1221, when a start winning in the first starting winning opening 13 occurs, a symbol designating command, a variable category command, a first start winning designating. A command and a set of four commands, ie, a command for specifying the total number of storages to be held, are transmitted collectively within one timer interrupt.

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the second starting port switch 14a is in an on state (step S1222). If the second opening switch 14a is not on, the process is terminated. If the second starting port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the number of second reserved storages has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second reserved storage for counting the number of second reserved storages). It is checked whether the value of the number counter is 4) (step S1223). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved storage number counter by 1 (step S1224), and increases the value of the total reserved storage number counter for counting the total reserved storage number. Is incremented by 1 (step S1225). In addition, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in an area corresponding to the value of the total number of reserved storage counters in the reserved storage specific information storage area (reserved specific area) (step S1226).

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating a software random number, and storing them in a storage area in the second hold storage buffer (see FIG. 20B). Step S1227). In the process of step S1227, a random R (hard hit determination random number) which is a hardware random number, a jackpot type determination random number (random 1) which is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. In addition, instead of extracting the fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 3) in the starting opening switch passing process (at the time of starting winning) and storing it in the storage area in advance, the random number is extracted at the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol. You may. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning effect process (step S1228). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect effect process (step S1229), and transmits the variable category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. The control is performed (step S1230). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1231), and sets the value of the total pending storage number counter to EXT data to set the total pending storage number designation command. Is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1232).

  By executing the processing of steps S1229 and S1230, in this embodiment, regardless of the gaming state (whether the state is the high probability state or the high base state, or the state of the big hit game), the CPU 56 Always transmits both the symbol designating command and the variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100 every time the second start winning port 14 is started.

  Also, in this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S1229 to S1232, when a start winning at the second starting winning opening 14 occurs, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a second starting winning designation, A command and a set of four commands, ie, a command for specifying the total number of storages to be held, are transmitted collectively within one timer interrupt.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the prize-winning effect processing of steps S1217 and S1228. In the prize-winning effect processing, the CPU 56 first compares the random number (random R) for jackpot determination extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 with the jackpot determination value in the normal state shown in the left column of FIG. It is checked whether they match (step S220). In this embodiment, at the timing when the change of the special symbol and the effect symbol is started, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in a special symbol normal process to be described later, a big hit type is determined, and the variation pattern is set in the variation pattern setting process. Alternatively, at the timing when the game ball starts and wins in the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, before the fluctuation display based on the starting winning is started, By executing the prize-winning effect processing, it is confirmed in advance whether a big hit or a small hit or not, and which judgment value range of the random number for judging the type of the big hit and the variation pattern type is determined.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the normal big hit determination value (N in step S220), the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is a high probability state (probable change state. High probability / high base state and high probability / It is determined whether or not a high probability flag indicating that the low base state is included is set (step S221). If the high probability flag is set, the CPU 56 compares the random number (random R) for jackpot determination extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 with the jackpot determination value at the time of the probability change shown in the right column of FIG. It is determined whether or not they match (step S222). Note that a plurality of variable displays may be executed between the time when it is determined in step S221 that the winning change is made at the start winning prize and the time when the variable display based on the start winning is actually started. There is. For this reason, the game state has changed between the time when it is determined in step S221 whether or not the winning change is made at the time of the start winning and the time when the change display based on the start winning is actually started (for example, the start of the change). If a 15R probability variable hit, 8R probability variable hit, or sudden probability variable hit occurs before, the state changes from the normal state to the probability change state.). Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S221 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of change (see step S61 described later) do not always match. In order to prevent such inconsistency, a game with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and a determination on the start winning is made based on the game state after the change. Is also good.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the big hit determination value at the time of the probability change (N in step S222), the CPU 56 compares the big hit determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 with FIG. ) And (C) are compared with each other to check whether they match (step S223). In this case, if there is a start winning in the first starting winning opening 13 (in the case where the winning effect process of step S1217 is executed), the CPU 56 determines whether the small hit determination table (the first hit winning table) shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set for the special symbol. Also, when there is a start winning in the second starting winning opening 14 (when executing the winning effect process of step S1228), the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8C. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in (1).

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in step S223), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data “00 (H)” indicating “out” in the symbol designation command. Is performed (step S224).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of determining the current gaming state (step S225). In this embodiment, in step S225, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the gaming state is the high probability state and the high base state (specifically, the high probability flag and the high base flag are set. Or not). In addition, after confirming whether or not the high probability state and the high base state in step S225 at the time of the start winning, until the fluctuation display based on the starting winning is actually started, More than one variable display may be performed. Therefore, in the step S225 at the time of starting winning, it is checked whether or not it is in the high probability state and whether or not it is in the high base state. May change (for example, if a 15R probability variable hit, 8R probability variable hit, or sudden probability variable hit occurs before the start of the change, the state changes from the normal state to the probability change state). Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S225 at the time of the start winning is not always the same as the gaming state determined at the start of the change (see step S61 described later). In order to prevent such inconsistency, a game with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and a determination on the start winning is made based on the game state after the change. Is also good.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets each threshold value for out-of-position according to the determination result of step S225 (step S226). In this embodiment, a threshold determination program for performing a threshold determination in advance is incorporated, and by determining whether or not the value is larger than the threshold, the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination falls in any of the determination value ranges. Is determined, and the value of the EXT data set in the fluctuation category command shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 is determined.

  For example, if the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the high probability / high base state, the CPU 56 sets the threshold 219. In this case, in step S232 described later, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining a variation pattern type is equal to or less than the threshold value 219. Determines that “08 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If it is not equal to or less than the threshold value 219 (that is, if it is 220 to 251), it is determined that “09 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16).

  Further, for example, the CPU 56 sets a threshold value 79 when determining that the gaming state is the high probability / low base state. In this case, in step S232 described later, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than a threshold value 79. Determines that “0A (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold value 79 (that is, if it is 80 to 251), it is determined that “0B (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 56 sets the thresholds 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 regardless of the total number of reserved storages. In this case, in step S232 described later, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than a threshold value 79. Determines that “00 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is equal to or less than 89 (that is, if the threshold value is 80 to 89), it is determined that “01 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If it is equal to or less than the threshold value 99 (that is, if it is 90 to 99), it is determined that “02 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the difference is less than or equal to the threshold value 169 (that is, if it is 100 to 169), it is determined that “03 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the difference is equal to or smaller than the threshold 199 (that is, if the difference is 170 to 199), it is determined that “04 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If it is less than or equal to the threshold value 214 (that is, if it is 200 to 214), it is determined that “05 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If it is equal to or less than the threshold value 229 (that is, if it is 215 to 229), it is determined that “06 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold value 229 (that is, if it is 230 to 251), it is determined that “07 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16).

  In the example of the threshold determination described above, the thresholds are determined to be 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 in ascending order of the threshold value. It does not fall within the range below the threshold value of the previous order. That is, after determining whether or not the threshold value is equal to or less than the threshold value 79, when determining whether or not the threshold value is equal to or less than the threshold value 89, the value does not fall within the range of 1 to 79 which is equal to or less than the threshold value in the previous order. Is determined to be within the range. Further, in this embodiment, the case where the threshold value is determined to be 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 in ascending order is shown, but conversely, 229, 214, 199, 169, 99, 89 and 79 may be determined. The same applies to the case where the determination is made using the other threshold values described below.

  The threshold in the normal state (low probability / low base state) may always be set without performing the determination of the game state in step S225. Even with such a configuration, since the range of the determination value is at least common for the variation pattern type of “non-reach loss” and the variation pattern type of “super-reach loss”, It can be determined whether or not “out-of-reach” or “out-of-reach” occurs.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y in step S223), the CPU 56 sends the EXT data “05 (H)” indicating “small hit” to the symbol designating command. Is performed (step S227).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a threshold value for small hits (step S228). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 sets the threshold 251. In step S232 described later, the CPU 56 determines that the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold 251 (1 to 251). It is determined that “18 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the fluctuation category command (see FIG. 17). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined that the EXT data “18 (H)” is set as it is without performing the threshold determination.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the big hit determination value in step S220 or step S222, the CPU 56 determines the big hit type based on the big hit type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227. Is determined (step S229). In this case, if there is a start winning in the first starting winning opening 13 (in the case where the winning effect processing of step S1217 is executed), the CPU 56 determines the big hit type determination table (first step) shown in FIG. It is determined whether the big hit type is “15R probable big hit”, “8R probable big hit” or “sudden probable big hit” by using the special symbol 131a. In addition, when there is a start winning at the second starting winning opening 14 (when executing the winning effect processing of step S1228), the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. Using 131b, it is determined whether the jackpot type is “15R probable big hit”, “8R probable big hit” or “sudden probable big hit”.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data according to the jackpot type determination result in the symbol designation command (step S230). In this case, if it is determined that the hit is "15R certain change big hit", the CPU 56 performs a process of setting EXT data "01 (H)" indicating "15R certain change big hit" in the symbol designating command. Further, when it is determined that the “8R probability change big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data “02 (H)” indicating the “8R probability change hit” in the symbol designating command. Further, when it is determined that the "sudden probability change big hit" is reached, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data "04 (H)" indicating the "sudden probability change big hit" to the symbol designation command.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets each big hit threshold value according to the big hit type determined in step S229 (step S231).

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the thresholds 74 and 149 when it is determined to be "8R probable big hit". In this case, in step S232 described later, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold 74, and when the value is equal to or smaller than the threshold 74 (that is, 1 to 74). Determines that “10 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If it is equal to or smaller than the threshold 149 (that is, if it is 75 to 149), it is determined that “11 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If it is not equal to or smaller than the threshold value 149 (that is, if it is 150 to 251), it is determined that “12 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  In addition, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that “15R certain variation big hit”, the thresholds 38 and 79 are set. In this case, in step S232 described later, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 38. Determines that “13 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is equal to or less than 79 (that is, if it is 39 to 79), it is determined that “14 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold value 79 (that is, if it is 80 to 251), it is determined that “15 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that “suddenly variable big hit”, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 100. In this case, in step S232 described later, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 100. Determines that “16 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is not less than 100 (that is, if it is 101 to 251), it is determined that “17 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the threshold value set in steps S226, S228, and S231 and the random number for randomizing pattern type randomization (random 2) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 to determine which of the random number for randomizing pattern type determination has occurred. It is determined whether the value falls within the range of the determination value (step S232).

  In steps S226, S228, and S231, instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, a variation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is set. Using the determination table, the range of the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type and the type of the variation pattern may be determined.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data according to the determination result in the variable category command (Step S233). Specifically, the CPU 56 determines “00 (H)” to “0B (H)” or “10B” as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 according to which variation pattern type is determined in step S232. (H) to 18 (H) are set in the EXT data of the variable category command.

  Note that, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which the range of the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is uniformly determined even when it is determined that a large hit or a small hit is determined in the winning determination. When it is determined that a big hit or a small hit occurs, the determination of the range of the random number for the variation pattern type determination may not be performed. Then, a symbol designating command indicating that it has been determined at the time of a prize when it is a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted, and a change category command comprehensively indicating that the change pattern type is a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted. . And, for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 does not specifically indicate which variation pattern type is used, but the variation that is comprehensively indicated as one of the jackpot variation pattern types is shown. The hold display may be displayed based on the reception of the category command.

  FIGS. 22 and 23 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 checks the value of the total number of reserved storages (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the sum reserved storage number is 0, if the customer wait demonstration designation command has not been transmitted yet, control is performed to transmit the customer wait demonstration designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S51A), and the processing is performed. finish. Note that, for example, upon transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command in step S51A, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted. When the special symbol normal processing is executed after the next timer interrupt after the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmission completed flag is set and the customer waiting demonstration is repeated. What is necessary is just to control not to transmit a demonstration designation command. In this case, the customer waiting demo designation command transmitted flag may be reset when the next special symbol change display is started.

  In step S51, the CPU 56 does not check the value of the total number of reserved storages, but checks whether data is set in the first area of the specific hold area. If there is, the process may proceed to step S52, and if not set, it may be determined that there is no hold storage and the process may proceed to step S51A.

  If the total reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether the first data among the data set in the reserved specific area (see FIG. 20A) is the data indicating “first”. (Step S52). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is not the data indicating “first” (that is, the data indicating “second”) (N in step S52), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol pointer (No. Data indicating “second” is set in a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is performed for one special symbol or the special symbol process processing is performed for the second special symbol (step S53). If the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating "first" (Y in step S52), the CPU 56 sets data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step S54). ).

  By executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, in this embodiment, the variation of the first special symbol in accordance with the starting winning order in which the game balls have won the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 in this embodiment. The display or the change display of the second special symbol is executed. In this embodiment, the first special symbol change display or the second special symbol change display is executed in accordance with the start winning order in which the game balls have won the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Although a case is shown in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed, the variable display may be executed with priority. In this case, for example, when the state is shifted to the high base state, it is easy to make a winning start in the second starting winning opening 14 provided with the variable winning ball device 15 and it is easy to accumulate the second reserved memory. The change display of the special symbol may be executed with priority.

  In the case of performing the change display of the second special symbol with priority, the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) is determined by the big hit determination in the low-probability state in the winning effect production process shown in FIG. Only the process of comparing with the value may be executed, and may not be compared with the jackpot determination value in the high probability state. (Specifically, only the process of step S220 is executed, and the processes of steps S221 and S222 are executed. May not be performed). With such a configuration, in a case where the change display of the second special symbol is executed with priority, the big hit determination result at the time of the winning determination and the big hit determination result at the start of the actual change are determined. Deviation can be prevented.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (Step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines that each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer Is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer by one and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and sets the value in the reserved specific area and the first reserved storage buffer. Shift the contents of each storage area. When the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by one and the contents of each reserved area in the reserved specific area and the second reserved storage buffer are shifted. I do.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 stores the first reserved storage number in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55. Each of the stored random numbers is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each of the symbols stored in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4). The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved number of storage = n-1. Further, the CPU 56 sums the values (values indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage area corresponding to the total number of reserved storages = m (m = 2 to 8) in the reserved specific area. It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages = m-1.

  Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved storage numbers (or the respective second reserved storage numbers) are always the first reserved storage number (or (The number of second reserved storages) = 1, 2, 3, and 4. In addition, the order in which the values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective summed pending storage numbers are extracted always coincides with the order of the summed suspended storage number = 1 to 8.

  Then, the CPU 56 reduces the value of the total number of reserved storages by one. That is, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is decremented by 1 (step S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control of transmitting a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 according to the current game state (step S60). In this case, the CPU 56 sets the high probability high base state background when the high probability flag indicating the high probability state is set and the high base flag indicating the high base state is set. Controls transmission of the specified command. When only the high-probability flag is set and the high-base flag is not set, the CPU 56 controls to transmit a high-probability low-base state background designation command. If neither the high probability flag nor the high base flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control for transmitting a normal state background designation command.

  Specifically, when transmitting the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets an address of a command transmission table (preset in the ROM for each command) according to the effect control command. Set to pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S28). In this embodiment, when the special symbol starts to change, for each timer interrupt, the background control command, the change pattern command, the display result specifying command, and the total pending storage number subtraction specifying command are set in this order. This will be transmitted to the computer 100. Specifically, when changing the special symbol, a background designating command is transmitted first, a fluctuation pattern command is transmitted after a lapse of 4 ms, a display result specifying command is further transmitted after a lapse of 4 ms, and after a lapse of 4 ms. A command for designating the subtraction of the total number of storages held is transmitted. At the start of the special symbol variation, a symbol variation designation command (first symbol variation designation command, second symbol variation designation command) is also transmitted, but the symbol variation designation command is the same timer interrupt command as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is to be performed on the first starting winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is to be performed on the first special symbol. ", Or data indicating" second "indicating that processing is to be performed on the second start winning opening 14, that is," second "indicating that processing is to be performed on the second special symbol. Data is set to the special symbol pointer. Then, in the subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, processing according to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the processing of steps S300 to S310 can be shared between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out a random R (random hit determination random number) from the random number buffer area, and executes the big hit determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 reads out the random number for jackpot determination extracted in step S1216 or step S1227 of the starting port switch passage process and stored in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer in advance, and performs the jackpot determination. The big hit determination module compares a predetermined big hit determination value or a small hit determination value (see FIG. 8) with the big hit determination random number, and executes a process of deciding to determine a big hit or a small hit if they match. It is a program to do. In other words, it is a program for executing the processing of the big hit determination and the small hit determination.

  In the big hit determination process, when the game state is a probable change state (high probability / high base state, high probability / low base state), the probability that the game state is a big hit is higher than in the non-probability state (normal state). Is configured to be higher. More specifically, a large-hit-judgment-judgment table (a table in the ROM 54 in which a numerical value on the right side of FIG. 8A is set in the ROM 54) in which a large number of big-hit determination values are set in advance, There is provided a normal-time jackpot determination table (a table in the ROM 54 in which numerical values on the left side in FIG. 8A are set) which are set to be smaller than the time-and-big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is the probable change state. When the gaming state is the probable change state, the CPU 56 performs a process of determining a big hit using the probable change time big hit determination table, and the game state is normally set. When it is in the state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the random number for random determination (random R) matches any one of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 8A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a jackpot. When it is determined that a big hit is to be made (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. In addition, to determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but to determine whether or not the stop symbol in the special symbol display is a big hit symbol. But also.

  It should be noted that whether or not the current game state is the probability change state is determined based on whether or not the high probability flag is set. The high probability flag is set when the game state is shifted to the probable change state, and is reset when the probable change state ends. Specifically, it is determined to be "15R probability variable big hit", "8R probability variable big hit" or "sudden probability variable big hit", and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Then, when the variable display of a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 70 times) is ended after the big hit game is ended, the reset is performed.

  If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 8B and 8C). Then, the small hit determination process is performed. That is, when the value of the random number for random determination (random R) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is to be a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 checks the data indicated by the special symbol pointer. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. ) Is used to determine whether to make a small hit. When the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “second”, it is determined whether or not to make a small hit using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8C. . If it is determined that the small hit is made (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating that the small hit is made (step S63), and proceeds to step S75.

  If the value of the random R does not match any of the large hit determination value and the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is out of the range, the process proceeds directly to step S75.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating a big hit. Then, a big hit type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used for determining the big hit type to be one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 selects the big hit type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8D. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 selects the big hit type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select the type corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number (random 1) for the jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area (“15R probable big hit”, “ 8R probability change big hit "or" sudden probability change big hit ") is determined as the type of the big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 reads out the random number for jackpot type determination extracted in step S1216 or step S1227 of the starting port switch passage process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, and determines the jackpot type. Do. Further, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. The probability that sudden change big hits are suddenly selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the data indicating the determined big hit type in the big hit type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the jackpot type is “15R probable big hit”, “01” is set as the data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “8R probable big hit”, “02” is set as the data showing the big hit type. When the jackpot type is "suddenly changing big hit", "04" is set as data indicating the jackpot type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a stop symbol of the special symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which is a lost symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the big hit flag is set, one of the big hit symbols “1”, “7”, and “9” is determined as the special symbol stop symbol according to the big hit type determination result. That is, if the jackpot type is determined to be "suddenly variable jackpot", "1" is determined to be a special symbol stop symbol, and if it is determined to be "8R probability variable jackpot", "7" is determined to be a special symbol stop symbol. When it is determined, and it is determined to be "15R probable big hit", "9" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the small hit flag is set, the small hit symbol "5" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is determined first and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is determined is shown. The present invention is not limited to the embodiment. For example, a table in which a special symbol stop symbol and a jackpot type are associated in advance is prepared, and a special symbol stop symbol is first determined based on the jackpot type determination random number, and a corresponding jackpot is determined based on the determination result. You may comprise so that a type may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 determines that the change pattern type is one of a plurality of types, as the big hit change pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C (FIG. 9A ) To (C)) (step S92). Then, control goes to a step S102.

  If the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S93). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 determines that the variation pattern type is one of a plurality of types, as a small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D (FIG. 9D ) Is selected (step S94). Then, control goes to a step S102.

  If the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high base flag indicating the high base state is set (step S95). The high base flag is set when the game state is shifted to the certain change state, and is reset when the high base state ends. Specifically, it is determined to be "15R probability variable hit" or "8R probability variable hit", and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. In addition, it is reset when the variable display of a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 70 times) is ended after the end of the big hit game.

  If the high base flag is not set (N in step S95), the CPU 56 checks whether the high probability flag indicating the high probability state is set (step S96). If the high-probability flag is not set (N in step S96), that is, if the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total number of reserved storages is 3 or more (step S97). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S97), the CPU 56 determines that the variation pattern type is one of a plurality of types, as the table used to determine the variation pattern type for a loss 135A ( 10 (see FIG. 10A) (step S98). Then, control goes to a step S102.

  When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S97), the CPU 56 determines whether the variation pattern type is one of a plurality of types, as the outlier variation pattern type determination table. 135B (see FIG. 10B) is selected (step S99). Then, control goes to a step S102.

  If the high-probability flag is set (Y in step S96), that is, if the gaming state is the high-probability / low-base state, the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type to be one of a plurality of types. As a table to be used for this, a variation pattern type determination table 135D (see FIG. 10D) is selected (step S100). Then, control goes to a step S102.

  If the high base flag is set (Y in step S95), that is, if the gaming state is the high probability / high base state (in this embodiment, the state is controlled to the low probability / high base state). Therefore, if the high base flag is set, it is in the high probability / high base state). The pattern type determination table 135C (see FIG. 10C) is selected (step S101). Then, control goes to a step S102.

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S95 to S101, when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of storages to be retained is 3 or more, the variation for out-of-position shown in FIG. The pattern type determination table 135B is selected. When the gaming state is the high probability / high base state, the outlier variation pattern type determination table 135C shown in FIG. 10C is selected. In this case, the non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S102 described later, and if the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the variation may be determined in the process of step S105. Non-reach PA1-2 of shortened variation is determined as a pattern (see FIG. 12). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the high probability / high base state, or when the total number of pending storages is three or more, the fluctuation display of the shortened fluctuation may be performed. In this embodiment, a variation pattern type determination table for shortened variation used in the high probability / high base state (see FIG. 10C) and a variation pattern type determination table for shortened variation based on the number of retained storages (see FIG. 10C). Although FIG. 10B shows a different table, a common table may be used as the fluctuation pattern type determination table for shortened fluctuation.

  In this embodiment, even when the gaming state is the high base state, if the total number of pending storages is almost 0 (for example, 0 or 0 or 1), The fluctuation display of the shortened fluctuation may not be performed. In this case, for example, when determining “Y” in step S95, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total number of reserved storages is substantially zero. The determination table 135A (see FIG. 10A) may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out the random number 2 (the random number for determining the variation pattern type) from the random number buffer area (the first storage buffer or the second storage buffer), and performs the processing in step S92, S94, S98, S99, S100 or S101. By referring to the selected table, the variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S102).

  Next, the CPU 56 determines whether the variation pattern is one of a plurality of types, based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S102, as a hit variation pattern determination table 137A, 137B (see FIG. 11). ), And selects one of the out-of-place variation pattern determination tables 138A (see FIG. 12) (step S103). In addition, the random number 3 (the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern) is read from the random number buffer area (the first storage buffer or the second storage buffer), and the fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern determination table selected in step S103. Is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S105). In the case where the random number 3 (the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern) is not extracted at the timing of the start winning prize, the CPU 56 sets the random number counter for the fluctuation pattern determination for generating the random number for the fluctuation pattern determination (random 3). , The fluctuation pattern may be determined based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol change designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol change designation command. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol change designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control of transmitting an effect control command (a fluctuation pattern command) corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S107).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (Step S108). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission processing (Step S302) (Step S109).

  In the case where it is determined to be a loss, instead of suddenly determining the variation pattern type, first, it may be determined whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a reach determination random number. Then, based on the determination result of whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S95 to S102 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, a variation pattern type determination table for non-reach (including the variation pattern types of non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-3 shown in FIG. 10) and a variation pattern type determination table for reach (FIG. (Including the variation pattern types of normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6 and super CA2-7) shown in FIG. 1 and prepare one of the variation pattern type determination tables based on the reach determination result. Alternatively, the variation pattern type may be determined.

  Also, when determining whether or not to reach by the lottery process using the random number for reach determination, the reach of the reach is determined in accordance with the total number of reserved storages (the number of first reserved storages or the number of second reserved storages). A reach determination table having a different selection ratio may be selected to determine whether or not reach is performed so that the reach probability decreases as the number of pending storages increases. In this case, the CPU 56 determines, for example, whether or not “super reach loss” or “non-reach loss” in the prize-winning effect process matches the determination value assigned to the common range of the reach determination table. The determination as to whether or not the vehicle may be reached may be made in advance. In consideration of the fact that the execution ratio of the notice effect is reduced, as shown in this embodiment, without performing the lottery process using the reach determination random number, the “super reach loss” depending on the variation pattern type. It is preferable to determine in advance whether or not "non-reach loss" and display the hold display.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits any one of the display result 1 to the display result 6 designation effect control commands (see FIG. 13) according to the determined type of the big hit, the small hit, and the loss. Control. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process moves to step S118. When the big hit flag is set, according to the type of the big hit, the control is performed to transmit the display result 2 designation command when it is "15R certain change big hit", and the display result 3 is set when it is "8R certain change big hit". Control for transmitting the designated command is performed (step S112). It should be noted that the determination as to whether the hit is “15R probability change big hit” is made by confirming whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “01”. It is possible to determine whether or not it is "8R probable big hit" by specifically confirming whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is "02". it can. Further, the CPU 56 performs a control to transmit the display result 5 designation command when it is not a probability change big hit, that is, when it is a sudden change probability big hit (step S117).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S110), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S118). If the small hit flag has been set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the display result 6 designation command (step S119). If the small hit flag has not been set (N in step S118), that is, if the small hit has occurred, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (step S120).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol change processing (step S303) (step S121).

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol change processing, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not the command for designating the subtraction of the total number of reserved storages has already been transmitted (step S1121). It should be noted that whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted is determined, for example, by transmitting the total pending storage number subtraction designation command when transmitting the total pending storage number subtraction designation command in step S1122 described below. Is set, and in step S1121, it is determined whether or not the sum reserved storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set. Also, in this case, the set sum reserved storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is reset by a special symbol stop process or a big hit end process described later when ending the change display of the special symbol or ending the big hit. do it.

  Next, if the total reserved storage number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the total reserved storage number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1122).

  Next, the CPU 56 decrements the variable time timer by 1 (step S1125), and when the variable time timer times out (step S1126), performs control to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (step S304) (step S1128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). If the big hit flag is set, if set, the CPU 56 resets the high probability flag indicating the high probability state and the high base flag indicating the high base state (step S132). ), Control to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S133). Specifically, when the type of the big hit is “15R certain big hit” or “8R certain big hit”, a big hit start designation command (command A001 (H)) is transmitted. If the type of big hit is sudden change big hit, a small hit / sudden change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) is transmitted. It should be noted that whether the type of the big hit is “15R probable big hit”, “8R probable big hit” or “sudden probable big hit” is data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55 (stored in the big hit type buffer). Data).

  In addition, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, a time for notifying the occurrence of the big hit in the effect display device 9) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S134). The number of times of opening of the special winning opening counter is, for example, 15 in the case of "15R probable big hit", 8 in the case of "8R probable big hit", and 2 in the case of "sudden probable big hit". ) Is set (step S135). Also, a round time per round in the big hit game is set. In the case of sudden probability change big hit, 0.1 second is set as a round time, and in the case of 15R probability change big hit or 8R probability big hit, 29 seconds is set as round time. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S136).

  If the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high probability flag indicating the high probability state is set (step S137). If the high-probability flag is set (that is, if it is in the probable state (high-probability / high-base state or high-probability / low-base state)), it indicates the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the high-probability state. The value of the high probability number counter is decremented by one (step S138). When the value of the high-probability counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S139), the CPU 56 resets the high-probability flag (step S140). If the high probability flag has not been set, the process proceeds to step S141.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high base flag indicating the high base state is set (step S141). When the high base flag is set (that is, in the case of the high probability / high base state), the value of the high base number counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the high base state is decremented by -1 ( Step S142). Then, when the value of the high base number counter after the subtraction becomes 0 (step S143), the CPU 56 resets the high base flag (step S144). Then, control goes to a step S145. If the high base flag has not been set, the process directly proceeds to step S145.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S145). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit / suddenly variable big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S146). Further, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (a time when the small hit has occurred, for example, the effect display device 9 is notified) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S147). Also, the number of times of opening (for example, two times) is set in the special winning opening number counter (step S148). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit start pre-processing (step S308) (step S149).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S145), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S150).

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the big hit end process (step S307) in the special symbol process process. In the big hit end processing, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a big hit end display timer is set (step S160). If the big hit end display timer is set, the CPU 56 shifts to step S164. If the big hit end display timer is not set, the big hit flag is reset (step S161), and control for transmitting a big hit end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, if it is a 15R probability change big hit or 8R probability change big hit, a big hit end designation command is transmitted, and if it is a sudden change big hit, a small hit / sudden sudden change big hit end designation command is transmitted. Then, a value corresponding to a display time corresponding to a time during which the big hit end display is being performed on the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the process ends.

  In step S164, the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (step S164). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big hit end display time has elapsed (step S165). If not, the process ends.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 checks whether the type of the big hit is the 15R certain change big hit or the 8R certain change big hit (step S166). It should be noted that whether the 15R probability variable jackpot, the 8R probability variable jackpot, or the sudden probability variable jackpot is determined by the data set in the jackpot type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is "01", "02" or It can be determined by confirming whether or not "04". If it is a 15R probability change jackpot or an 8R probability change hit, the CPU 56 sets the time reduction flag to shift the gaming state to the time reduction state (step S167), and sets 70 to the high base number counter (step S168). Further, a high-probability flag is set to shift the gaming state to the probable change state (step S169), and 70 is set to the high-probability counter (step S170). Then, control goes to a step S171. If it is neither the 15R probability variable jackpot nor the 8R probability variable jackpot (that is, if it is sudden probability variable jackpot), the CPU 56 proceeds to step S169.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S171).

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. When the power is turned on, effect control CPU 101 starts execution of the main process. In the main process, first, an initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 4 ms) of the effect control is performed (step S701). . Thereafter, effect control CPU 101 shifts to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt processing. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command, and performs a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs an effect control process (step S705). In the effect control process process, a process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, effect control CPU 101 performs a fourth symbol process process (step S706). In the fourth symbol process process, a process corresponding to the current control state (fourth symbol process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and is selected in the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9. The display control of the fourth symbol is executed.

  Next, a random number updating process for updating the count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S707). After that, the procedure moves to step S702.

  FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a ring buffer type command receiving buffer capable of storing six effect control commands having a 2-byte configuration is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of the reception command buffers 1 to 12. Then, a command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is to be stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. It is not always necessary to use the ring buffer format.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis processing, the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed as to which command (see FIGS. 13 and 14). Note that the interrupt processing based on the effect control INT signal is executed prior to the timer interrupt processing executed every 4 ms.

  FIGS. 31 and 32 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis processing (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the received command buffer. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 checks the contents of the command stored in the command receiving buffer.

  In the command analysis processing, first, effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a received command is stored in the command receiving buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. If the received command is stored in the command receiving buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the received command from the command receiving buffer (step S612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step S613). The reason for adding +2 is that two bytes (one command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a fluctuation pattern command (step S614), effect control CPU 101 stores the received fluctuation pattern command in a fluctuation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step S617), effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 6 designation command) in RAM. The display result designation command storage area is stored (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol determination designation command (step S619), effect control CPU 101 sets a determination command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is the jackpot start designation command (command A001 (H)) (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step S622).

  If the received effect control command is the small hit / suddenly variable big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) (step S623), the effect control CPU 101 sets the small hit / suddenly variable big hit start specified command reception flag. (Step S624).

  If the received effect control command is any of the symbol designating commands (step S651), the effect controlling CPU 101 stores the received symbol designating command in the first free prize command storage area formed in the RAM. (Step S652).

  FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the start winning command storage area. As shown in FIG. 33, areas (storage areas 1 to 8) corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total number of pending storages are secured in the start winning command storage area. In this embodiment, as shown in steps S1218 to S1221 and S1229 to S1232 of the start-up switch passing processing in FIG. In addition, four commands of a symbol designation command, a fluctuation category command, a start winning designation command (the first start winning designation command or the second start winning designation command), and a total holding storage number designation command are set in one timer interrupt. Sent by Therefore, as shown in FIG. 33, in each of the storage areas 1 to 8 of the start prize winning command storage area, a symbol designating command, a fluctuation category command, a start winning prize designating command, and a total holding storage number designation command can be stored in association with each other. Storage area is secured as described above.

  In the present embodiment, in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 stores commands in the first free storage area of the start winning command storage area in the order in which they are received. In this embodiment, commands are transmitted in the order of a symbol designation command, a fluctuation category command, a start winning designation command, and a total pending storage number designation command within one timer interrupt, so that if the command reception is normally performed, As shown in FIG. 33, in each of the storage areas 1 to 8, a symbol designation command, a fluctuation category command, a start winning designation command, and a total pending storage number designation command are stored in this order (in FIG. 33, An example in which commands are stored in storage areas 1 to 5 is shown).

  In the example shown in FIG. 33, up to seven pending storages have occurred in the previous fluctuation display, and the total pending storage number designation command (7) is designated in the storage area in which the latest command is stored. C207 (H)) is stored, and thereafter, the storage state of the start prize winning command storage area in a situation where one of the hold storages is exhausted and the variable display based on the second hold storage is started is shown. .

  Each command stored in the start prize winning command storage area shown in FIG. 33 is used in step S663 to be described later every time the display of the variation of the effect symbol is started (every time the command for designating the subtraction of the total number of retained storages is received). The content stored in the first storage area 1 is deleted, and the contents of the command storage area for starting winning are shifted. For example, when a variation display of a new effect symbol is started in the storage state shown in FIG. 33, each command stored in the storage area 1 is deleted, and each command stored in the storage area 2 is stored. Each command stored in the storage area 3 is shifted to the storage area 2, each command stored in the storage area 4 is shifted to the storage area 3, and stored in the storage area 5. Each command is shifted to the storage area 4. Note that the timing at which each command is deleted may be during the effect symbol variation start processing, which will be described later, at the timing at which the effect symbol variation display is started.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the symbol designation command, the variable category command, the start winning designation command, and the total number of retained storage number designation command received at the time of the occurrence of the start winning are comprehensively expressed, the command at the time of the starting winning is used. Say. In addition, among the commands at the time of the start prize winning, a start prize designation command and a total reservation storage number designation command which are commands for designating information capable of recognizing that the first hold number or the second hold number has increased are described. When expressed comprehensively, it is also referred to as pending storage information. In addition, a symbol designating command which is a command indicating whether a big hit or a small hit is determined in the winning effect processing (see FIG. 21) at the time of the start winning, a big hit type determination result, and a fluctuation pattern type determination result. When expressing the variable category command comprehensively, it is also referred to as a prize-winning-time determination result designation command or determination result information.

  Further, in this embodiment, in each of the storage areas 1 to 8 of the start winning command storage area, data indicating a change pattern of the display mode of the hold display and the active display (hereinafter, referred to as a “hold change pattern”), A storage area is secured so that data indicating the change timing of the display mode can be stored. As the pending change patterns, P01 not changing from “white”, P02 changing from “white” to “red”, P03 not changing from “red”, changing from “white” to “red”, and further changing to “gold” A changing P04 and a changing P05 from “red” to “gold” are provided (see FIG. 39A). In addition, as the change timing, the “n-th” which is the timing shifted to the n-th (n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7) suspended display, and the display of the active display is started. A timing “active start” and a timing “active” after a predetermined period (13 seconds) have elapsed since the start of the active display are provided (see FIG. 40). Note that although the active time is determined as the change timing, if the change time of the corresponding change is shorter than 13 seconds, the display mode of the active display changes one second before the change stops. The pending change pattern and the change timing are determined and stored at the time of starting winning. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 33, P01 is determined as the pending change pattern of the first to fourth pending storages, and P04 is determined as the pending change pattern of the fifth pending storage. Indicate that the “fourth” and “active” were determined as the change timings of the pending storage of “.

  If the received effect control command is any of the variable category commands (step S653), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variable category command in each of the storage areas 1 in the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. 8 is stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designating command is stored (step S654A). Then, a variable category command reception flag indicating that the variable category command has been received is set (step S654B).

  If the received effect control command is the first start winning designation command (step S655), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received first start winning designation command in each of the start winning time command storage areas formed in the RAM. The latest symbol designating command and the variable category command are stored in the storage areas 1 to 8 (step S656B).

  If the received effect control command is the second start winning designation command (step S657), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received second start winning designation command in each of the start winning command storage areas formed in the RAM. The latest symbol designating command and the variable category command are stored in the storage area of the storage areas 1 to 8 (step S658B).

  If the received effect control command is the command for specifying the number of storages to be added (step S659), the CPU for effect control 101 stores the received command for specifying the number of storages to be stored in each of the start-up winning command storage areas formed in the RAM. It is stored in the storage area where the latest symbol designating command, the fluctuation category command and the start winning designating command are stored in the storage areas 1 to 8 (step S660).

  If the received effect control command is the command for designating the subtraction of the total number of storages to be held (step S661), the effect control CPU 101 deletes the first hold display in the total hold storage display section 18c and changes the remaining hold display to 1. The display is shifted one by one, and the display of the number of stored summaries in the summed storage display unit 18c is updated (step S662). For example, when the first to fifth hold indications of the combined hold storage display section 18c are lit and displayed, and when the command for specifying the subtraction of the number of held saves is received, the first hold display is deleted. Simultaneously, the second hold display is shifted to the first display area, the third hold display is shifted to the second display area, and the fourth hold display is displayed. The suspended display that has been displayed is shifted to the third display area, and the suspended display that has been displayed for the fifth time is shifted to the fourth display area.

  At this time, if there is a hold display that has reached the change timing, the display is changed to a display mode according to the hold change pattern. Specifically, whether the first change timing of the storage area 2 is stored, the second change timing of the storage area 3 is stored, or the third change timing of the storage area 4 is stored. Whether the storage area 5 has a fourth change timing, the storage area 6 has a fifth change timing, or the storage area 7 has a sixth change timing. When the seventh change timing of the storage area 8 is stored, the display mode of the corresponding hold display is changed according to the hold change pattern. For example, when the next change is started from the time illustrated in FIG. 33 and the process of step S662 is performed, the fourth and active states are stored as the change timing of the storage area 5, and P04 is stored as the pending change pattern. Therefore, the display mode is changed from "white" to "red" when shifting the hold display displayed on the fifth display area to the fourth display area.

  Then, effect control CPU 101 starts displaying the active display (step S662a). For example, if the hold display displayed in the first display area is the hold display of the effect mode display mode, the display of the active display is started in the same effect mode display mode. Further, if the hold display displayed in the first display area is not the hold display of the presentation mode display mode, if the active start time is stored as the change timing of the storage area 1, the hold change pattern is used. The active display is performed in a corresponding display mode (“red” when the pending change pattern is P02 or P04 and before the first change, and “gold” after P04 and after the first change or P05). When the display is started and the active start time is not stored as the change timing of the storage area 1, the display mode is changed to a display mode similar to the hold display displayed in the first display area of the combined hold storage display unit 18c. To start displaying the active display.

  The effect control CPU 101 moves the data in the storage area 1 in the command storage area at the time of the start prize to an active information storage area (not shown) formed in the RAM (step S663A), and stores the data in the storage areas 2 to 8. Are shifted and stored in the storage areas 2 to 7, respectively (step S663). The active information storage area is the same type of information as the start winning command storage area (symbol designation command, fluctuation category command, start winning designation command, total pending storage number designation command, suspension change pattern, change timing 1, change timing 2). Can be stored as information corresponding to the active display.

  If the received effect control command is another command, effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S684). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not a new start winning command has been received (step S800A). If the command has been received, the special zone control for controlling the special zone effect is performed. A process (step S800B) and a hold display control process (step S800C) for controlling the hold display are executed.

  Next, effect control CPU 101 performs any one of steps S800 to S810 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled, and the variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, the control relating to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also performed in the second control. The control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process. The variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the second special symbol may be executed by different effect control process. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is being executed based on which effect control process process has performed the effect symbol variation display.

  Variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis processing is set. If the variation pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801).

  Effect symbol variation start process (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the effect symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change process (step S802).

  Processing during effect symbol fluctuation (step S802): The switching timing of each fluctuation state (fluctuation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern is controlled, and the end of the fluctuation time is monitored. Then, when the fluctuation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change stop process (step S803).

  Effect symbol fluctuation stop processing (step S803): Control is performed to stop the fluctuation of the effect symbol and to derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S804), and the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit display process (step S808) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800). .

  Big hit display processing (step S804): After the end of the fluctuation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit on the effect display device 9. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during the round (step S805).

  Processing during round (step S805): Display control during round is performed. Then, if the round end condition is satisfied, and if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S806). If the last round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during the round (step S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S807): The effect display device 9 performs display control for notifying the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Small hit display processing (step S808): After the end of the fluctuation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of a small hit on the effect display device 9. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening processing (step S809).

  Small hit opening processing (step S809): Processing for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special winning opening is performed. When the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied and there is still a remaining opening, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit display process (step S808). When all the openings have been completed, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect process (step S810).

  Small hit end effect processing (step S810): The effect display device 9 performs display control for notifying the player that the small hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the special zone control processing. In the special zone control processing, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether a special zone in-flight flag indicating that the special zone effect is being executed or an entry waiting flag indicating that the special zone effect is waiting to be started is set. Is determined (steps S3501 and S3502), and if either is set, the special zone control process is terminated. This prevents a special zone effect in which a plurality of fluctuations are to be notified from being executed repeatedly.

  When neither the special zone inside flag nor the entry waiting flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the entry failure standby flag indicating that it is waiting for the start of the entry failure effect is set. (Step S3503) If it is set, the special zone control process is terminated.

  If the entry failure standby flag has not been set, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not all of the previously stored hold memories are hold memories corresponding to non-reach loss (step S3504). More specifically, if the variable category 1 designation command, the variation category 9 designation command, or the variation category 11 designation command is stored in all storage areas before the storage area corresponding to the newly stored hold storage, It is determined that all the previously stored pending memories are the pending memories corresponding to the non-reach loss.

  If all of the previously stored hold memories are hold memories corresponding to non-reach outliers, a special zone for determining whether or not to execute a special zone effect for which a newly generated hold memory is to be notified is performed. A zone entry lottery process is executed (step S3505). Specifically, it is determined whether or not to execute a special zone effect using the special zone entry lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 36A is an explanatory diagram showing a special zone entry lottery table. In the special zone entry lottery table shown in FIG. 36 (A), a determination value corresponding to the presence or absence of execution of the special zone effect is assigned according to the determination result at the time of prize (15R probability change big hit or 8R probability change big hit, super reach out, etc.). However, in the example shown in FIG. 36A, the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown for simplification of the description. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for a special zone entry lottery, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

  For example, when the prize-winning determination result is a 15R probability variable hit or a 8R probability variable hit (when a symbol 2 designation command or a symbol 3 designation command is received), executing the special zone effect at a rate of 60% is 40%. It is determined not to execute the special zone effect at the rate of.

  Further, for example, when the winning determination result is out of super reach (when a variable category 8 designation command, a variation category 10 designation command or a variation category 12 designation command is received), a special zone effect is executed at a rate of 30%. Is determined not to perform a special zone effect at a rate of 70%.

  Further, for example, when the result of the winning determination is other, it is determined that the special zone effect is not executed at a rate of 100%. In other words, the configuration is such that the special zone effect can be executed only when the 15R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot or super reach is out, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, a special zone effect may be executable even if the vehicle is out of reach.

  When it is determined that the special zone effect is to be executed (entry into the special zone) (Y in step S3506), the effect control CPU 101 sets an entry wait flag (step S3507), and executes the special zone effect Is performed (step S3508). Specifically, the number of executions of the special zone effect is determined using the execution number determination lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 36B is an explanatory diagram illustrating an execution number determination lottery table. In the execution number determination lottery table shown in FIG. 36B, the number of executions of the special zone effect according to the prize-winning determination result (15R probability change big hit or 8R probability change big hit, super reach out, etc.) The determination value corresponding to K is assigned. In the example shown in FIG. 36B, the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown for simplification of the description. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for execution number determination lottery, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

  As shown in the figure, when the number of executions K is “1”, the active display for the change of the notice target is displayed (specifically, 5 seconds after the start of the active display). , The execution of the special zone effect is started. When the number of executions K is “2”, the special display is performed when the hold display for the change of the notice target is the first hold display (specifically, 5 seconds after the first hold display is performed). Execution of the zone effect is started. When the number of executions K is “3”, a special display is performed when the hold display for the change of the notice target is the second hold display (specifically, 5 seconds after the second hold display is performed). Execution of the zone effect is started. When the number of executions K is “4”, a special display is performed when the hold display for the change of the notice target is the third hold display (specifically, 5 seconds after the third hold display is performed). Execution of the zone effect is started. Although the maximum value of the number of executions K is “4” in the present embodiment, a configuration in which a value equal to or more than “5” is selectable as the number of executions K may be adopted.

  For example, when the total number of stored storages is 1, “1” is determined as the number of executions K at a rate of 100% regardless of the winning determination result.

  For example, if the total number of stored suspensions is 2, if the prize-winning determination result is a 15R probability change jackpot or an 8R probability change hit (if a symbol 2 designation command or a symbol 3 designation command has been received), the rate is 40%. “1” is determined as the execution number K at a rate of 60% and “2” is determined. Also, if the result of the prize-winning determination is a loss of super reach (if a variable category 8 designation command, a variation category 10 designation command or a variation category 12 designation command has been received), “1” becomes 40 at a rate of 60% and 40 “2” is determined as the number of executions K at a rate of%.

  For example, if the total number of stored suspensions is 3, if the prize-winning determination result is a 15R probability change jackpot or an 8R probability change hit (if a symbol 2 designation command or a symbol 3 designation command is received), the rate is 20%. “1” is determined as the number of executions K, “2” at a rate of 30%, and “3” at a rate of 50%. If the result of the prize-winning determination is that the super reach has been lost (if the variable category 8 designation command, the variation category 10 designation command, or the variation category 12 designation command has been received), “1” becomes 30 at a rate of 50%. The number of executions K is determined as “2” at the rate of% and “3” at the rate of 20%.

  For example, if the total number of stored reservations is 4 or more, and if the prize-winning determination result is a 15R probability variable hit or an 8R probability variable hit (if a symbol 2 designation command or a symbol 3 designation command is received), a 10% ratio Is determined as the number of executions K, “2” at a rate of 20%, “3” at a rate of 30%, and “4” at a rate of 40%. If the result of the prize-winning determination is that the super reach has been lost (if the variable category 8 designation command, the variation category 10 designation command, or the variation category 12 designation command has been received), “1” becomes 30 at a rate of 40% and 30 The number of executions K is determined as “2” at the rate of%, “3” at the rate of 20%, and “4” at the rate of 10%.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the greater the number of executions K, the higher the reliability with respect to the 15R probability variation hit and the 8R probability variation hit.

  The effect control CPU 101 sets the lottery result as the number of executions K (step S3509), and sets the total reserved storage number to the remaining number of times R, which is the number of remaining fluctuations until the special zone effect is notified (step S3510). The remaining number R is decremented by one each time a change is performed (see steps S4602 and S4610), and a successful rush effect is executed in a change in which the value obtained by adding 1 to the remaining number R and the number of executions K become the same value. And the special zone effect is started (Y in step S4603, see S4605), and the special zone effect ends when the remaining number R becomes “0” (Y in step S4606, S4611). Y).

  When it is determined that the special zone effect is not to be executed (not to enter the special zone) (N in step S3506), it is determined whether or not to execute a rush failure effect with a new hold storage as a notification target. A rush failure effect execution lottery is performed (step S3511). Specifically, using the entry failure effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 36 (C), it is determined whether or not the entry failure effect is to be executed.

  FIG. 36 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a rush failure effect execution lottery table. In the entry failure production effect lottery table shown in FIG. 36 (C), a judgment value corresponding to the presence / absence of execution of the special zone effect in accordance with the prize-winning judgment result (15R certain-change big hit or 8R certain-change big hit, super reach out, etc.). In the example shown in FIG. 36 (C), the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown for simplification of the description. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for entry failure effect execution lottery, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

  For example, when the prize-winning determination result is a 15R probability variable hit or a 8R probability variable hit (when a design 2 designation command or a design 3 designation command is received), executing the special zone effect at a rate of 20% is 80%. It is determined not to execute the special zone effect at the rate of.

  In addition, for example, when the prize-winning determination result is out of super reach (when a variable category 8 designation command, a variation category 10 designation command or a variation category 12 designation command is received), a special zone effect is executed at a rate of 10%. Is determined not to perform a special zone effect at a rate of 90%.

  For example, when the winning determination result is other, it is determined that the special zone effect is executed at a rate of 1% and the special zone effect is not executed at a rate of 99%.

  When the entry failure production is performed (Y in step S3512), an execution timing determination lottery for determining the execution timing of the entry failure production is performed (step S3513). Specifically, the execution timing of the entry failure effect is determined using the execution timing determination lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 36D is an explanatory diagram showing an execution timing determination lottery table. The execution timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 36 (D) shows the execution timing of the entry failure effect according to the prize-winning judgment result (15R probability change big hit or 8R probability change big hit, super reach out, etc.) for each of the total number of stored memories. Are assigned, but in the example shown in FIG. 36 (D), the ratio of the assigned determination values is shown to simplify the description. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for execution timing determination lottery, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

  As shown in the figure, each execution timing is associated with a timing specification number for specifying the execution timing. For example, the timing identification number “0” for “active” of the timing at which the active display for the change of the notice target is displayed is “1” for the timing at which the hold display for the change of the notice target is the first hold display. The timing specific number “1” is set for the “second”, and the timing specific number “2” is set for the “second” of the timing when the hold display for the change of the notice target is the second hold display. The timing identification number “3” is associated with the “third” of the timing at which the suspended display for the change is the third suspended display.

  In the present embodiment, since the value of 1 to 4 can be selected as the number of executions K of the special zone effect (see FIG. 36 (B)), the display of the change of the notice target is the fourth or more. Although the entry failure effect is not executed at the timing of the hold display, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if a value greater than or equal to “5” can be selected as the number of executions K, the entry failure effect can be executed even when the hold display for the change of the notice target is the fourth or higher hold display. It may be.

  For example, when the total number of reserved storages is 1, “active” is determined as the execution timing at a rate of 100% regardless of the winning determination result.

  For example, if the total number of stored suspensions is 2, if the winning determination result is a 15R probability change jackpot or an 8R probability change hit (if a symbol 2 designation command or a symbol 3 designation command is received), the rate is 60%. “Active” is determined as the execution timing at a rate of 40% and “first” is determined. If the result of the prize-winning determination is a loss of super reach (if a variable category 8 designation command, a variation category 10 designation command or a variation category 12 designation command has been received), “active” is 60% at a rate of 40%. The “first” is determined as the execution timing at the rate of%. In addition, if the result of the winning determination is other, “active” is determined as the execution timing at a rate of 20% and “first” at a rate of 80%.

  For example, if the total number of reserved storages is 3, if the prize-winning determination result is a 15R probability change jackpot or an 8R probability change hit (if a symbol 2 designation command or a symbol 3 designation command has been received), the rate is 50%. The “active” is determined as the execution timing of the “first” at a rate of 30%, and the “second” at a rate of 20%. If the result of the prize-winning determination is a loss of super reach (if a variable category 8 designation command, a variation category 10 designation command, or a variation category 12 designation command has been received), “active” becomes 30 at a rate of 20%. The “first” is determined as the execution timing at a rate of 50% and the “second” at a rate of 50%. If the prize-winning result is other than the above, “active” is determined as the execution timing at a rate of 10%, “first” at a rate of 20%, and “second” at a rate of 70%. Is done.

  For example, if the total number of stored suspensions is 4, if the winning determination result is a 15R probability change jackpot or an 8R probability change hit (if a symbol 2 designation command or a symbol 3 designation command is received), the rate is 40%. “Active” is determined as the execution timing of “first” at a rate of 30%, “second” at a rate of 20%, and “third” at a rate of 10%. If the result of the winning determination is out of super reach (if the fluctuation category 8 designation command, the variation category 10 designation command or the variation category 12 designation command is received), “active” is 20% at a rate of 10%. The “first” is determined as the execution timing at a rate of 30%, the “second” at a rate of 30%, and the “third” at a rate of 40%. If the result of the prize-winning determination is other than “active” at a rate of 5%, “first” at a rate of 10%, “second” at a rate of 15%, and a rate of 70% Is determined as the execution timing.

  After that, the effect control CPU 101 sets an inrush failure standby flag (step S3514), and associates the remaining standby number P, which is the number of remaining fluctuations until the inrush failure effect is executed, with the execution timing determined in step 3513. The value obtained by subtracting the specified number of timings from the total number of reserved storages is set (step S3515). The remaining standby number P is decremented by one each time the fluctuation is executed (see step S4614), and the rush failure effect is executed when the fluctuation becomes “0” (Y in step S4615, S4616). reference).

  FIG. 37 and FIG. 38 are flowcharts showing the hold display control processing. In the hold display control process, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a hold change pattern determination lottery for determining a hold change pattern of the hold display for a newly generated hold memory (step S3701). Specifically, a pending change pattern is determined using the pending change pattern determination table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 39A is an explanatory diagram showing a pending change pattern determination table. The determination values corresponding to the pending change patterns are assigned to the respective pending change pattern determination tables shown in FIG. 39 (A) in accordance with the prize-winning determination result (15R probable big hit or 8R probable big hit, out of super reach, etc.). However, in the example shown in FIG. 39A, the ratio of the assigned determination values is shown for simplification of the description. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for a lottery determination to determine a pending change pattern, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

  For example, when the prize-winning determination result is a 15R probability change jackpot or an 8R probability change hit (when a symbol 2 designation command or a symbol 3 designation command is received), P01 at a rate of 10%, P02 at a rate of 15%, P03 is determined as a pending change pattern at a rate of 20%, P04 at a rate of 25%, and P05 at a rate of 30%.

  For example, if the prize-winning determination result is out of super reach (if a variable category 8 designation command, a variation category 10 designation command, or a variation category 12 designation command is received), P01 has a rate of 70%, and a rate of 15%. , P03 at a rate of 7%, P04 at a rate of 5%, and P05 at a rate of 3% are determined as the pending change patterns.

  For example, if the result of the winning determination is other, P01 is determined as the pending change pattern at a rate of 100%.

  By determining the hold change pattern at such a ratio, the reliability of the hold display or the active display for the 15R certain change big hit or the 8R certain change big hit has white <red <gold.

  Further, the pending change pattern in the present embodiment is a pending change pattern that does not become “red” (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “no red”; for example, P01), and a pending change pattern that becomes “red” (hereinafter, referred to as “red”). There is also a case where “red is present.” For example, other than P01.) Thus, the selection ratios of red and non-red are shown in FIG.

  As shown in the figure, if the winning determination result is a 15R probability change jackpot or an 8R probability change hit, red is selected at a rate of 90% and no red is selected at a rate of 10%. If the winning determination result is out of super reach, red is selected at a rate of 30% and no red is selected at a rate of 70%. If the result of the prize-winning determination is other, the absence of red is selected at a rate of 100%.

  Here, when the selection ratio of execution of the special zone effect shown in FIG. 36A is compared with the selection ratio with red shown in FIG. In the case of a big hit, the selection ratio with red is higher than the ratio of executing the special zone effect, while if the judgment result at the time of winning is out of super reach, the selection ratio with red executes the special zone effect. Lower than the rate to do. Therefore, when red is selected, the reliability with respect to the 15R probability variable hit or the 8R probability variable hit is higher than when the execution of the special zone effect is selected. That is, in the present embodiment, the display of the hold display or the active display in the display mode of “red” is configured to have higher reliability than the special zone effect.

  In the present embodiment, P02 to P05 can be selected only when the winning determination result is the 15R probability change hit, the 8R probability change hit, or the super reach is lost, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, P02 to P05 may be selectable even if the prize-winning determination result is suddenly changed big hit, small hit, out of normal reach or out of non-reach.

  Next, effect control CPU 101 stores the data indicating the pending change pattern determined in step S3701 in a storage area (a storage area corresponding to the total number of reserved storages) in the start winning command storage area, thereby changing the pending change. The pattern is stored (step S3702). If the stored change pattern is a change pattern with no change (P01 or P03), the flow shifts to step S3710. If the stored change pattern is a change pattern with change (any of P02, P04, and P05), a change timing determination lottery for determining a change timing is performed (step S3704). Specifically, the change timing is determined using the first change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 40A or the second change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 40B.

  FIG. 40A is an explanatory diagram showing a first change timing determination lottery table. FIG. 40B is an explanatory diagram showing a second change timing determination lottery table. Each of the change timing determination lottery tables shown in FIGS. 40 (A) and (B) is assigned a determination value corresponding to the change timing for each of the total number of pending storages, and is shown in FIGS. 40 (A) and (B). In the example, for simplification of the description, the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for a change timing determination lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

  First, a case where the change timing determination lottery is performed using the first change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. The first change timing determination lottery table is a change timing determination lottery table used when the result of the winning determination is a big hit.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is “1”, the change timing is determined to be “active” at a rate of 60% and “active start” at a rate of 40%.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is “2”, the change timing is determined to be “active” at a rate of 50%, “active start time” at a rate of 30%, and “first” at a rate of 20%.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is “3”, active at a rate of 40%, active start at a rate of 30%, first at a rate of 20%, and two at a rate of 10% The eye is determined as the change timing.

  For example, if the total number of pending storages is "4", the active status is 30%, the active status is 25%, the first status is 20%, and the status is 2 at 15%. The third eye is determined at a rate of 10% as the change timing.

  For example, if the total number of pending storages is "5", the active status is 22%, the active status is 20%, the first status is 18%, and the active status is 2% at 16%. The third eye is determined as the change timing at a rate of 14%, and the fourth eye at a rate of 10%.

  For example, if the total number of pending storages is "6", the active status is 22%, the active status is 18%, the first status is 16%, and the second status is 14%. The third eye is determined as the change timing at the rate of 12%, the fourth eye at the rate of 10%, and the fifth eye at the rate of 8%.

  For example, if the total number of pending storages is “7”, the active status is 20%, the active status is 18%, the first status is 16%, and the active status is 2% at 14%. The third eye is determined as the change timing at the rate of 12%, the fourth eye at the rate of 10%, the fifth eye at the rate of 6%, and the sixth eye at the rate of 4%.

  For example, if the total number of pending storages is "8", the active status is 20%, the active status is 18%, the first status is 16%, and the second status is 14%. 3 eyes at 12%, 4 eyes at 8%, 5 eyes at 6%, 6 eyes at 4%, 7 eyes at 2% The eye is determined as the change timing.

  Next, a case where the change timing determination lottery is performed using the second change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 40B will be described. The second change timing determination lottery table is a change timing determination lottery table used when the winning determination result is out of super reach.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is “1”, the change timing is determined to be “active” at a rate of 40% and “active start” at a rate of 60%.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is “2”, the active state is determined as the change timing at a rate of 20%, the start time of the active state at a rate of 30%, and the first one at a rate of 50%.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is “3”, active at a rate of 10%, active start at a rate of 20%, first at a rate of 30%, and two at a rate of 40% The eye is determined as the change timing.

  For example, if the total number of pending storages is “4”, the active status is 10%, the active status is 15%, the first status is 20%, and the second status is 25%. The third eye is determined as the change timing at a rate of 30%.

  For example, if the total number of pending storages is "5", active at a rate of 10%, active start at a rate of 14%, first at a rate of 16%, and two at a rate of 18% The third eye is determined as the change timing at a rate of 20%, and the fourth eye at a rate of 22%.

  For example, if the total number of pending storages is "6", the active status is 8%, the active status is 10%, the first status is 12%, and the second status is 14%. The third eye is determined as the change timing at a rate of 16%, the fourth eye at a rate of 18%, and the fifth eye at a rate of 22%.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is “7”, the active status is 4%, the active status is 6%, the first status is 10%, and the second status is 12%. The third eye is determined as a change timing at a rate of 14%, the fourth eye at a 16% rate, the fifth eye at an 18% rate, and the sixth eye at a 20% rate.

  For example, if the total number of pending storages is “8”, the active state is 2%, the active state is started at 4%, the first is 6%, and the 2 is 8%. Third eye at 12% ratio, fourth eye at 14% ratio, fifth eye at 16% ratio, sixth eye at 18% ratio, seven eye at 20% ratio The eye is determined as the change timing.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is easier to determine an earlier time from the start of the hold display as the change timing in the case of the loss than in the case of the big hit. Therefore, as the timing at which the display mode of the hold display or the active display changes, the later the start of the hold display, the higher the reliability of the big hit. Conversely, the configuration may be such that the earlier the on-hold display is started, the higher the reliability of the big hit, or the change timing may not indicate the reliability of the big hit.

  In the present embodiment, when the prize-winning determination result is neither a big hit nor a super-reach loss (other cases), only P01 can be selected as the pending change pattern. Although the determination lottery table is not provided, any other change timing determination lottery table may be provided as long as it is configured to be able to select the pending change pattern in which the display mode changes. Is also good.

  After that, the effect control CPU 101 stores the determined change timing in the start winning command storage area (step S3705). If the pending change pattern stored in step S3702 is the pending change pattern with two changes (ie, P04) (Y in step S3706), the change timing determination lottery is performed again (step S3707), and the determination is made. If the change timing thus determined is different from the change timing stored in step S3705 (N in step S3708), the change timing determined in step S3707 is stored in the start winning command storage area (step S3709). If the change timing determined in step S3707 is the same as the change timing stored in step S3705 (Y in step S3708), a change timing determination lottery (step S3705) is performed until a change timing different from the change timing stored in step S3705 is determined. Step S3707) is repeatedly executed. Thereby, two different change timings are determined. Note that a plurality of combination patterns of two change timings are provided, and two change timings may be collectively determined by selecting one of them.

  After that, the effect control CPU 101 executes a process related to displaying the hold display in the effect suggestion display mode (steps S3710 to S3725). The process specifically includes a first process (steps S3710 to S3713) related to displaying a hold display in the first special suggestion mode and a second process related to displaying a hold display in the second special suggestion mode. The process (steps S3714 to S3717), the third process related to displaying the hold display in the pseudo continuous suggestion mode (steps S3718 to S3721), and the fourth process related to displaying the hold display in the SP suggestive mode (step S3718) S3722 to S3725).

  Hereinafter, the hold display in the first special suggestion mode is “first special suggestion hold”, the hold display in the second special suggestion mode is “second special suggestion hold”, and the hold display in the pseudo continuous suggestion mode is “pseudo continuous suggestion hold”. , The hold indication in the SP suggestion mode may be referred to as “SP suggestion hold”.

  First, effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not a new hold storage is scheduled to enter a special zone to be notified (step S3710). For example, in the above-described special zone control process (see FIG. 35), when it is determined that the vehicle enters the special zone (for example, immediately after Y in step S3506), a flag is set, and the flag is set. For example, it is determined that the new reserved memory is scheduled to enter the special zone to be notified.

  If the new hold storage is going to enter the special zone to be notified, a first special suggestion execution lottery for determining whether to display the first special suggestion hold is performed (step S3711). Specifically, it is determined whether or not to execute the first special suggestion suspension using the first special suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 41A is an explanatory diagram showing a first special suggestion execution lottery table. In the first special suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 41 (A), a determination value corresponding to the presence / absence of execution of the display of the first special suggestion hold is assigned to each of the winning determination result and the hold change pattern. In the example shown in FIG. 41A, the ratio of the assigned determination values is shown for simplification of the description. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for the first special suggestion execution lottery, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

  For example, when the prize-winning determination result is a 15R probability variable hit or a 8R probability variable hit (when a symbol 2 designation command or a symbol 3 designation command is received), if the pending change pattern is P01, the first change rate is 40%. It is determined that performing the display of the special suggestion suspension does not perform the display of the first special suggestion suspension at a rate of 60%. If the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the display of the first special suggestion hold is performed at a rate of 80% and the display of the first special suggestion hold is not performed at a rate of 20%. You.

  For example, if the prize-winning determination result is out of super reach (if a variable category 8 designation command, a variation category 10 designation command, or a variation category 12 designation command is received), if the pending change pattern is P01, 30% It is determined that performing the display of the first special suggestion suspension at a rate does not perform the display of the first special suggestion suspension at a rate of 70%. If the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the display of the first special suggestion hold is performed at a rate of 60% and the display of the first special suggestion hold is not performed at a rate of 40%. You.

  If it is determined to execute the display of the first special suggestion suspension, the display of the first special suggestion suspension is started as the suspension display for the new suspension storage (step S3713).

  If the new hold storage is not scheduled to enter the special zone to be notified in step S3710, or if the display of the first special suggestion hold is not executed in step S3712, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the new hold storage is to enter the special zone to be notified. Perform a notice effect (if you are going to move to a special zone (if you are going to execute a successful entry), or if you are not going to move to a special zone but you are going to execute an inrush failure effect. Is included) (step S3714). For example, in the above-described special zone control process (see FIG. 35), when it is determined that the vehicle enters the special zone (for example, immediately after Y in step S3506), a flag is set, and the flag is set. For example, it is determined that the new hold storage is to execute a rush-successful effect for a notice object. Further, for example, in the above-described special zone control process (see FIG. 35), when it is determined that the entry failure effect is to be executed (for example, immediately after Y in step S3512), a flag is set. If so, it is determined that the new hold storage is to execute a rush-failure effect to be announced.

  When the rush notice effect is scheduled to be executed, a second special suggestion execution lottery for determining whether or not to display the second special suggestion hold is performed (step S3715). Specifically, it is determined whether or not to execute the display of the second special suggestion suspension using the second special suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 41B is an explanatory diagram showing a second special suggestion execution lottery table. In the second special suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 40 (B), a rush success effect is executed as a determination value corresponding to whether or not to display the second special suggestion hold for each winning change determination result and hold change pattern. Although different values are assigned for the case of performing and the case of executing the entry failure effect, in the example shown in FIG. 41 (B), for simplification of the description, the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown. I have. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for the second special suggestion execution lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

  First, the case where the winning determination result is the 15R probability change big hit or the 8R probability change big hit (the case where the symbol 2 designation command or the symbol 3 designation command is received) will be described.

  For example, when a successful entry effect is scheduled to be executed (when shifting to a special zone), if the hold change pattern is P01, the display of the second special suggestion hold can be executed at a rate of 40%. , 60% is not to be displayed. If the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the display of the second special suggestion hold is performed at a rate of 80% and the display of the second special suggestion hold is not performed at a rate of 20%. You.

  For example, when the entry failure production is scheduled to be executed (when the transition to the special zone is not to be performed), if the hold change pattern is P01, the display of the second special suggestion hold can be executed at a rate of 80%. , 20% not to display the second special suggestion hold. If the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the display of the second special suggestion hold is performed at a rate of 40% and the display of the second special suggestion hold is not performed at a rate of 60%. You.

  Next, a case will be described in which the prize-winning determination result is a super reach loss (when a fluctuation category 8 designation command, a fluctuation category 10 designation command, or a fluctuation category 12 designation command is received).

  For example, when a successful entry effect is scheduled to be executed (when shifting to a special zone), if the hold change pattern is P01, the display of the second special suggestion hold can be executed at a rate of 30%. , 70% of the time is not displayed. If the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the display of the second special suggestion hold is performed at a rate of 60% and the display of the second special suggestion hold is not performed at a rate of 40%. You.

  For example, when the entry failure production is scheduled to be executed (when the transition to the special zone is not planned), if the hold change pattern is P01, the display of the second special suggestion hold can be executed at a rate of 60%. , 40% is not to be displayed. If the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the display of the second special suggestion hold is performed at a rate of 30% and the display of the second special suggestion hold is not performed at a rate of 70%. You.

  Lastly, a case where the winning determination result is other will be described.

  For example, when the entry failure production is scheduled to be executed (when the transition to the special zone is not planned), the display of the second special suggestion suspension is not executed at a rate of 100% in any of the suspension change patterns. Is determined. In the present embodiment, when the result of the prize-winning determination is other than the above, since the configuration does not enter the special zone, it is determined whether or not the display of the second special suggestion suspension is to be performed when performing the entry success production. No decision value has been assigned for the decision.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the hold display can be displayed in the second special suggestion mode only when the prize-winning determination result is the 15R certain change big hit, the 8R certain change big hit, or the super reach is lost. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even when the prize-winning determination result is a sudden change big hit, a small hit, a normal reach loss, or a non-reach loss, the hold display may be displayed in the second special suggestion mode. Good.

  Further, as described above, when the hold change pattern is other than P01, the display of the second special suggestion hold is performed at a higher rate in the case of executing the rush success effect than in the case of executing the rush failure effect. It is configured. That is, when the display of the second special suggestion suspension is executed, the display mode is more likely to change to “red” when entering the special zone than when not entering the special zone. Note that the display mode may not be changed to “red” when the vehicle does not enter the special zone.

  Here, the second special suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 41 (B) is compared with the selection ratio of red hold shown in FIG. 39 (B). For example, when the prize-winning determination result is the 15R probability change hit or the 8R probability change hit, the selection rate with red is 90% (see FIG. 39 (B)), but the execution rate of the second special suggestion hold is 90%. % (See FIG. 41B). For example, when the winning determination result is out of super reach, the selection ratio with red is 30% (see FIG. 39 (B)), but the execution ratio of the second special suggestion hold is 30% or more. (See FIG. 41B). Therefore, the reliability of the 15R probability change jackpot or the 8R probability change hit is red hold> second special suggestion hold.

  When it is determined to execute the display of the second special suggestion suspension, the display of the second special suggestion suspension is started as the suspension display for the new suspension storage (step S3717).

  In a case where the new hold storage does not execute the rush announcement effect of the announcement target in Step S3714, or does not execute the display of the second special suggestion hold in Step S3716, the effect control CPU 101 causes the new hold storage to accompany the pseudo-sequence. It is determined whether or not the pseudo consecutive suspension is set (step S3718). For example, when the fluctuation category 7 specification command, the fluctuation category 22 specification command, or the fluctuation category 25 specification command has been received, it is determined that the pseudo consecutive suspension is performed. If it is a pseudo consecutive suggestion hold, a pseudo consecutive suggestion execution lottery for determining whether or not to display the pseudo consecutive suggestion hold is performed (step S3719). Specifically, it is determined whether or not to display pseudo-link suggestion suspension using the pseudo-link suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 41 (C).

  FIG. 41 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a pseudo consecutive suggestion execution lottery table. In the pseudo-suggestion suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 41 (C), determination values corresponding to the presence / absence of execution of display of pseudo-suggestion suggestion suspension are assigned to each of the winning determination result and the suspension change pattern. In the example shown in (C), the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown for simplification of the description. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for a pseudo consecutive suggestion execution lottery, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

  For example, when the prize-winning determination result is a big hit (when the fluctuation category 22 designation command or the fluctuation category 25 designation command is received), if the pending change pattern is P01, the display of the pseudo continuous suggestion suspension is displayed at a rate of 20%. Is determined not to perform the display of the pseudo-link suggestion hold at a rate of 80%. If the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the display of the pseudo-link suggestion hold is performed at a rate of 30% and the display of the pseudo-link suggestion hold is not performed at a rate of 70%.

  For example, when the prize-winning determination result is out of order (when the fluctuation category 7 designation command is received), if the hold change pattern is P01, the display of the pseudo consecutive suggestion hold is executed at a rate of 10%. It is determined not to display the pseudo-suggestion suggestion hold at a rate of 90%. If the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the display of the pseudo continuous suggestion hold is performed at a rate of 20% and the display of the pseudo continuous suggestion hold is not performed at a rate of 80%.

  If it is determined that the display of the pseudo-link suggestion hold is to be executed, the display of the pseudo-link suggestion hold is started as the hold display for the new hold storage (step S3721).

  If the new hold storage is not the pseudo continuous hold in step S3718, or if the display of the pseudo continuous suggestion hold is not executed in step S3720, effect control CPU 101 is the SP reach hold in which the new hold storage evolves into a super reach. It is determined whether or not this is the case (step S3722). For example, when the change category 8 designation command, the variation category 10 designation command, the variation category 12 designation command, the variation category 23 designation command, or the variation category 26 designation command are received, it is determined that the SP reach is pending. If the SP reach is suspended, a SP suggestion execution lottery for determining whether or not to display the SP suggestion suspension is performed (step S3723). Specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the SP suggestion suspension using the SP suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 41D is an explanatory diagram showing an SP suggestion execution lottery table. In the SP suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 41 (D), a determination value corresponding to the presence or absence of execution of display of SP suggestion suspension is assigned for each winning determination result and suspension change pattern. In the example shown in parentheses), the ratio of the assigned determination values is shown for simplification of the description. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for SP suggestion execution lottery, and determines a determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

  For example, when the prize-winning determination result is a big hit (when the fluctuation category 23 designation command or the fluctuation category 26 designation command is received), if the suspension change pattern is P01, the display of SP suggestion suspension is displayed at a rate of 30%. Is determined not to perform the indication of SP suggestion pending at a rate of 70%. If the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that display of SP suggestion hold is performed at a rate of 40% and display of SP suggestion hold is not performed at a rate of 60%.

  For example, when the winning determination result is out of order (when the fluctuation category 8 designation command, the fluctuation category 10 designation command, or the fluctuation category 12 designation command is received), if the pending change pattern is P01, the ratio is 20%. It is determined that the display of the SP suggestion suspension is not performed at the rate of 80%. If the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that display of SP suggestion hold is performed at a rate of 30% and that display of SP suggestion hold is not performed at a rate of 70%.

  If it is determined that the hold display in the SP suggestion mode is to be executed, the display of the SP suggestion hold is started as the hold display for the new hold storage (step S3725).

  Here, comparing the pseudo-link suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 41 (C) with the SP suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 41 (D), when the pending change pattern is other than P01, The execution ratio of the display of the suggestion suspension and the execution ratio of the display of the SP suggestion suspension are different. That is, the effect suggestion display mode is changed to "red" at a different rate based on the type of the effect suggestion display mode. This allows the user to pay attention to the type of the effect suggestion display mode.

  If the new hold storage is not the SP reach hold in step S3722, or if the display of the SP suggestion hold is not executed in step S3724, the effect control CPU 101 sets the display mode according to the hold change pattern stored in step S3702, The display of the hold display for the new hold storage is started (step S3726). Specifically, if any of P01, P02, and P04, the hold display is started with "white", and if it is P03 or P05, the hold display is started with "red".

  In the present embodiment, as shown in steps S3710 to S3725, the display timing of the hold display of the effect suggestion mode is the start winning, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hold display or the active display of the effect suggestion mode may be displayed at any timing, such as when shifting the hold display, during the fluctuation display, or during the active display.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the processing is executed in the order of the first processing, the second processing, the third processing, and the fourth processing, so that the execution priority (that is, the execution frequency) is the first special suggestion mode> second processing. It is conceivable that the special suggestion mode> pseudo-link suggestion mode> SP suggestion mode. Therefore, for example, it is possible to collectively determine which one of the first special suggestion mode, the second special suggestion mode, the pseudo continuous suggestion mode, and the SP suggestion mode displays the hold display or the active display. By providing a simple table, it is possible to prevent the execution priority (execution frequency) from being biased. Alternatively, even if a lottery is sequentially performed to determine whether or not to perform the hold display or the active display in each of the effect suggestion display modes as in the present embodiment, the execution ratio is lower as the lottery is performed first. By doing (the execution ratio increases as the lottery executed later), it is possible to prevent the execution priority (execution frequency) from being biased.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the hold display can be displayed only in a single effect suggestion display mode among the plurality of effect suggestion display modes, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hold display may be displayed in a plurality of effect suggestion display modes. For example, when it is determined that the hold display is performed in the first special suggestion display mode and the SP suggestion display mode, the hold display including the characters “special” and the characters “SP” is displayed. Is also good. Specifically, the first processing to the fourth processing described above may be independently executed, so that the hold display may be displayed in a plurality of effect suggestion display modes. In addition, since the notice effect produced by the first special suggestion display mode and the second special suggestion display mode is a special zone presentation, the hold display is performed in both the first special suggestion display mode and the second special suggestion display mode. It may be configured not to execute. For example, the hold display of the first special suggestion display mode may be displayed more preferentially than the hold display of the second special suggestion display mode.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag has been set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801) (step S813). As described above, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is also transmitted at the time of restoration from power failure (see step S44). However, as shown in FIG. , Based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command, shifts to the effect symbol fluctuation start processing and starts the fluctuation display of the effect symbol, so the fluctuation of the effect symbol only by receiving the display result designation command without receiving the fluctuation pattern command Display does not start.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start processing, the effect control CPU 101 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8001). Next, the effect control CPU 101 determines the display result (stop) of the effect symbol according to the variation pattern command read in step S8002 and the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command). (Symbol) is determined (step S8002). That is, when the processing of step S8002 is executed by the effect control CPU 101, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the stop of the effect symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol is realized. If a pseudo run is designated by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 101 determines in step S8002 that a temporary stop symbol (for example, “223” or “445”) is used as a temporary stop symbol in the pseudo run. , A combination of a symbol that does not become a reach, and a symbol that is shifted from the big hit symbol by one, or a combination of symbols that include special images that are not normally displayed (images other than numerals may be used). ") Is also determined. Also, in step S8002, if it is determined in step S8002 to execute a continuous effect of the effect mode of “change in variation mode at symbol variation”, a so-called chance symbol is used as a stop symbol of the effect symbol. (For example, a combination of a symbol that does not become a reach, such as “223” or “445”, and a symbol that is shifted by one symbol) is determined. The effect control CPU 101 stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area. In step S8002, the effect control CPU 101 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received fluctuation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol based on only the fluctuation pattern command. .

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 44, when the received display result specifying command indicates “15R probable big hit” or “8R probable big hit” (the received display result specifying command indicates the display result 2 specifying command or the display result 3 specifying If the command is a command), the effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols in which three symbols are the same as the stop symbol. It should be noted that the determination ratio of the stop symbol may be made different depending on whether it is “15R probability change big hit” or “8R probability change big hit”. For example, in the case of "15R probable big hit", the ratio of determining the combination of effect symbols in which the three symbols are the same odd pattern is increased, and in the case of "8R probable big hit", the three symbols are the same even number. You may make it high the ratio which determines the combination of the effect symbol prepared by the symbol.

  Further, when the received display result specifying command indicates “suddenly changing large hit” or “small hit” (when the received display result specifying command is the display result 5 specifying command or the display result 6 specifying command), The effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as “135” as a stop symbol. Then, in the case of "missing" (when the received display result specifying command is the display result 1 specifying command), combinations of effect symbols other than the above are determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of effect symbols having two left and right symbols is determined. The combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the “stop symbol” of the effect symbol.

  The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random symbol for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of the effect symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other, to determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols corresponding to the numerical values corresponding to the extracted random numbers.

  In addition, also with respect to the effect symbols, a stop symbol (a combination of symbols in which the left middle right is the same symbol) that recalls a big hit is referred to as a large hit symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that reminds the player of a loss is referred to as a "off symbol".

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs a notice effect (for example, a step-up notice effect, a mini-character notice effect, a movable object notice effect, a moving object notice effect, etc.) in the effect display device 9 during the change display of the effect symbol. Good) is executed or not, and an announcement effect setting process of setting an effect mode of the announcement effect is executed (step S8003).

  After that, the effect control CPU 101 executes a special zone setting process for setting a special zone effect (step S8003A).

  Next, when executing a variation pattern or a notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the notice effect (step S8004). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S8005).

  FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is configured by data in which a plurality of combinations of a process timer set value, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variable time) of the variable display of the effect symbol are described. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. In the process timer set value, a variation time in the variation mode is set. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control for displaying the effect symbols in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 45 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. Further, a process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

  Note that the effect control CPU 101 is determined to execute the notice effect, and when executing the notice effect, selects a process table corresponding to the notice effect in step S8004.

  In the process table used when performing the effect control for the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. Instead of setting the symbol to be stop-displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the pseudo-run or the temporary stop symbol in the slide effect. You may.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 generates the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect component, and the effect component as the effect component) in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). The control of the various lamps and the speaker 27) as an effect component is executed (step S8006). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to control the turning on / off of various lamps. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio output board 70 in order to output audio from the speaker 27.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control such that the effect pattern is variably displayed according to the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis. May be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S8007). Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802) (step S8008).

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the special zone setting processing. In the special zone setting process shown in FIG. 46, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the entry waiting flag is set (step S4601). If it is set, “1” is subtracted from the remaining number R. The set value is set as a new remaining number R (step S4602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value obtained by adding “1” to the set remaining number R and the number of executions K are the same (step S4603). If not, the special zone setting process is terminated as it is. If the values are the same, the entry waiting flag is reset (step S4604), and a successful entry effect and a special zone effect are set (step S4605). If the remaining number R is not 0, the special zone flag is set (N in step S4606, S4607). When the remaining number R is 0, the special zone effect has been completed in the next fluctuation, so that the special zone flag is not set.

  If the entry waiting flag has not been set in step S4601, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the special zone flag has been set (step S4608), and if the special zone flag has been set. The special zone effect is set (step S4609), and a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the remaining number R is set as a new remaining number R (step S4610). Then, when the remaining number of times R becomes “0”, the special zone flag is reset (Y in step S4611, S4612).

  If the special zone flag is not set in step S4608, it is determined whether or not the rush failure standby flag is set (step S4613). If it is set, the remaining standby number P is set to "1". The subtracted value is set as a new remaining standby number P (step S4614). Then, when the remaining standby number P becomes “0” (Y in step S4615), a rush failure effect is set (step S4616), and a rush failure standby flag is reset (step S4617).

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol change process (step S802) in the effect control process process. In the effect symbol change processing, it is determined whether or not it is the change timing of the active display (step S4701). Specifically, in the above-described active information storage area, active is stored as the change timing, and when a predetermined time (for example, 13 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the change, it is determined that the active display is the change timing. . Note that, as described above, although the active time is stored as the change timing, if the change time of the corresponding change is shorter than 13 seconds, one second before the stop of the change is determined as the change timing of the active display. Shall be. If it is the change timing of the active display, the display mode of the active display is changed with reference to the hold change pattern in the active information storage area (step S4702). For example, if the pending change pattern is P02, it is changed to "red", and if it is P04 or P05, it is changed to "gold".

  If the hold display or the active display is displayed in the first special suggestion mode (Y in step S4703), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the successful entry effect (step S4704). Specifically, when a successful entry performance is started in a variation having a variation time of 3 seconds or more, it is determined that the timing at which 3 seconds have elapsed since the start of the successful entry performance is the end timing of the successful entry performance. In the case where a successful entry effect is started during a change having a change time of less than 3 seconds, the timing 1 second before the stop of the change is determined to be the end timing of the successful entry process. If it is the end timing of the successful entry effect, the display mode of the hold display or the active display displayed in the first special suggestion mode is changed to a display mode corresponding to the hold display pattern after 5 seconds (step S4705). More specifically, if the pending change pattern is P01, it is “white”, if it is P02, it is “white” if it is before the change timing, if it is after the change timing, it is “red”. If it is P03, it will be "red"; if it is P04, it will be "white" before both change timings; if it is after one change timing but before the other change timing, it will be "red". If it is after both change timings, it is changed to "gold", if it is P05, it is changed to "red" before the change timing, and to "gold" after the change timing.

  In addition, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation of executing the successful entry rush is less than 8 seconds (the period for executing the successful entry rush (3 seconds), the display of the hold display or the active display after the end of the successful entry rush) In the case where the fluctuation time is shorter than the total period including the standby period (5 seconds) before changing the mode), the display mode of the hold display or the active display is changed one second before the stop of the fluctuation.

  When the hold display or the active display is displayed in the second special suggestion mode (Y in step S4706), it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the rush announcement effect (entry successful effect or rush failure effect). Is determined (step S4707). Specifically, when the rush announcement effect is started in a fluctuation having a fluctuation time of 3 seconds or more, it is determined that the timing at which 3 seconds have elapsed since the start of the rush announcement effect is the end timing of the rush announcement effect. If the rush announcement effect is started during a fluctuation having a fluctuation time of less than 3 seconds, the timing one second before the stop of the fluctuation is determined to be the end timing of the rush announcement effect. If it is the end timing of the rush notice effect, the display mode of the hold display or the active display displayed in the second special suggestion mode is changed to a display mode corresponding to the hold display pattern after 5 seconds (step S4708). More specifically, if the pending change pattern is P01, it is “white”, if it is P02, it is “white” if it is before the change timing, if it is after the change timing, it is “red”. If it is P03, it will be "red"; if it is P04, it will be "white" before both change timings; if it is after one change timing but before the other change timing, it will be "red". If it is after both change timings, it is changed to "gold", if it is P05, it is changed to "red" before the change timing, and to "gold" after the change timing.

  In addition, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation | variation which performed the rush announcement effect is less than 8 seconds (the period (3 seconds) for performing the rush announcement effect, and the display of hold display or active display after the end of the rush announcement effect) In the case where the fluctuation time is shorter than the total period including the standby period (5 seconds) before changing the mode), the display mode of the hold display or the active display is changed one second before the stop of the fluctuation.

  If the active display is displayed in the pseudo-link suggestion mode (Y in step S4709), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the pseudo-link (step S4710). More specifically, in the pseudo series, the re-change is generally started after the chance symbol pattern is stopped and displayed. In step S4710, the first re-change timing is determined as the start timing of the pseudo series. . The stop timing of the first chance symbol may be determined as the start timing of the pseudo run.

  If it is the start timing of the pseudo run, the display mode of the active display displayed in the pseudo run suggestion mode is changed to a display mode according to the hold display pattern after 5 seconds (step S4711). Specifically, if the pending change pattern is P01, it is “white”; if it is P02, it is “white” before the change timing; If it is P03, it will be "red", if it is P04, it will be "red" if it is after one change timing but before the other change timing, and it will be "gold) if it is after both change timings. , P05, it is changed to "red" before the change timing, and to "gold" after the change timing.

  Note that a variation pattern is provided in which the variation ends before 5 seconds elapse from the start timing of the pseudo-run, and when the display mode of the active display is changed during the variation of the variation pattern, a predetermined variation stop is set. The display mode of the active display may be changed before the time (for example, one second before).

  If the active display is displayed in the SP suggestion mode (Y in step S4712), it is determined whether it is time to start the super reach effect (step S4713). Specifically, the timing determined in advance for each variation pattern is determined as the start timing of the super reach effect. If it is the start timing of the super reach effect, the display mode of the active display displayed in the SP suggestion mode is changed to the display mode corresponding to the hold display pattern after 5 seconds (step S4714). Specifically, if the pending change pattern is P01, it is “white”; if it is P02, it is “white” before the change timing; If it is P03, it will be "red", if it is P04, it will be "red" if it is after one change timing but before the other change timing, and it will be "gold) if it is after both change timings. , P05, it is changed to "red" before the change timing, and to "gold" after the change timing.

  Note that a fluctuation pattern is provided in which the fluctuation ends before 5 seconds elapse from the start timing of the super reach effect, and when the display mode of the active display is changed during the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation stop is performed. The display mode of the active display may be changed a predetermined time before (for example, one second before).

  Thereafter, effect control CPU 101 decrements the value of the process timer by one (step S8101) and decrements the value of the variable time timer by one (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state of the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step S8105).

  If the variation time timer has timed out (step S8111), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S8032) (step S8112).

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol change stop process (step S803) in the effect control process process. In the effect design fluctuation stop processing, first, effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed is set (step S8301). If the stop symbol display flag has been set, the flow shifts to step S8305. In this embodiment, when a big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S8304. Then, when executing the fanfare effect, the stop symbol display flag is reset. Therefore, when the stop symbol display flag is set, it means that the big hit symbol has been stopped and displayed, but the fanfare effect has not been executed yet. Therefore, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S8302 is executed. The process moves to step S8305 without any processing.

  If the stop symbol display flag has not been set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbol (losing symbol, big hit symbol) (step S8302). Then, if neither the big hit symbol nor the small hit symbol is displayed in the process of step S8302 (that is, if a lost symbol is displayed) (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 goes to step S8302. Shifts to step S8313.

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8302 (Y in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 sets the stop symbol display flag (step S8304) and receives the big hit start designation command. It is checked whether the big hit start designation command reception flag indicating that the command has been set or the small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command reception flag indicating that the small hit / suddenly changing big hit start designation command has been received is set (step S8305). . If the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / suddenly variable big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S8306) and responds to the fanfare effect. A process table is selected (step S8307). The effect control CPU 101 resets the flag that has been set when the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / suddenly variable probability big hit start designation command reception flag is set.

  Then, effect control CPU 101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value to the process timer (step S8308), and the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number, sound number) In accordance with the data 1 and the movable member control data 1), an effect device (effect display device 9 as effect component, various lamps as effect component, speaker 27 as effect component, and movable member 78 as effect component) is effected. The control of the wing actors 79a and 79b) is executed (step S8309). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S804) (step S8310).

  When it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit is performed (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (step S8311). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets a first symbol variation designation command reception flag and a second symbol variation designation command reception flag. The effect control CPU 101 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process process or the fourth symbol process process (for example, as shown in step S811 in FIG. 42, the variation pattern As soon as the command reception flag is confirmed, the variation pattern command reception flag may be reset.) However, for example, since the symbol variation designation command is referred to in both the effect control process process and the fourth symbol process process, as shown in this embodiment, at the end of the variation, the effect symbol variation stop process, etc. It is desirable to reset in the big hit or in the big hit end effect processing when the big hit ends. Then, effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S8312).

  FIG. 49 and FIG. 50 are explanatory diagrams showing display examples when the hold display is displayed in the second special suggestion mode. First, while (1) the active display and the two pending displays are displayed, (2) a new pending storage occurs and the pending display corresponding to the pending storage is displayed in the second special suggestion mode (“ Special? "). At this time, it is determined that the special zone effect for which the reserved storage is to be notified is set to be executed, and that the number of executions K is set to “3” and the remaining number of times R is set to “3”. It is also assumed that P04 is determined as the pending change pattern, and the first and second patterns are determined as the change timing.

  Then, (3) the change ends at the gap, and (4) the next change starts. At this time, the active display corresponding to the new change is displayed, and the hold display is shifted. Then, the remaining number R becomes “2” (see step S4601), and the value obtained by adding “1” to the remaining number R and the number of executions K become the same value. See S4605). After 3 seconds have passed, (5) it is notified that the entry has been a successful entry effect, and the vehicle enters the special zone. Five seconds later, (6) the display mode of the hold display displayed in the second special suggestion mode changes to “red” (see step S4708).

Thereafter, the change ends at (7), and (8) the next change starts. At this time, the active display corresponding to the new change is displayed, and the hold display is shifted. Then, the hold change pattern of the hold display displayed in “red” is P04, and since the first change is included in the change timing, the display mode changes to “gold” (see step S662).

  FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display example when an active display is displayed in the second special suggestion mode. First, while (1) the active display and the two pending displays are displayed, (2) a new pending storage occurs and the pending display corresponding to the pending storage is displayed in the second special suggestion mode (“ Special? "). At this time, it is determined that the special zone effect for which the reserved storage is to be notified is set to be executed, and that the number of executions K is set to “1” and the remaining number of times R is set to “3”. It is also assumed that P04 has been determined as the pending change pattern, and the second and active states have been determined as the change timing.

  Then, the change is performed several times, and (3) the change corresponding to the hold display displayed in the second special suggestion mode is started. At this time, an active display corresponding to the new change is displayed. Then, the remaining number R becomes “0” (refer to step S4602), and the value obtained by adding “1” to the remaining number R and the number of executions K become the same value. See S4605). After 3 seconds have passed, (4) it is notified that the entry was successful, and the vehicle enters the special zone. Five seconds later, (5) the display mode of the active display displayed in the second special suggestion mode changes to “red” (see step S4708).

  After that, (6) the pending change pattern of the active display is P04, and the active timing is included in the change timing, so that the display mode changes to “gold” at the active display change timing (see step S4702).

  As described above, according to this embodiment, a gaming machine that can execute variable display, and displays a specific display corresponding to the variable display (in this example, a hold display and an active display) at least normally The aspect (“white” in this example), the first specific aspect (“red” in this example) having a higher degree of expectation than the normal aspect, and the second specific aspect (in this example, production Specific display means that can be displayed in any of display modes including a suggestion display mode (first special suggestion mode, second special suggestion mode, pseudo continuous suggestion mode, SP suggestion mode) (in this example, for effect control (Steps S662, S662a, S3713, S3717, S3721, S3725, S3726, S4702, S4705, S4708, S4711, S4714) of the microcomputer 100, and Effect executing means capable of executing an effect of the content suggested by the specific display in the fixed mode (in this example, executing steps S8006 and S8105 in the effect control microcomputer 100 according to the process table selected in step S8004). The specific display means displays the specific display in the second specific mode, and then suggests the specific display in the second specific mode. When the effect of the indicated content is executed (in this example, 5 seconds after the effect of the suggested content is executed), the display mode of the specific display can be changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode. (In the present example, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs steps S4702, S4705, S4708, S4711, S471 Is executed, if any of P02 to P05 is selected as the hold change pattern, the hold display or the active display displayed in the effect suggestion display mode as the second display mode is changed to the first display mode. (It can be changed to a specific mode of “red”). As a result, an expectation for the specific mode can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, a single display mode (“white”, “red”) is provided as each of the “normal mode” and the “first specific mode”. A plurality of display modes may be provided as at least one of the “first specific mode”. In addition, a plurality of display modes (first special suggestion mode, second special suggestion mode, pseudo continuous suggestion mode, SP suggestion mode) are provided as the “second specific mode”. , A single display mode may be provided.

  Further, the effect suggested by the “specific display of the second specific mode” is not limited to the above-described one, but a step-up notice effect that develops in a step-by-step manner, a character notice effect in which a character appears, and a line effect that displays a line. Any effect, such as a button effect that prompts the player to operate the operation button 120, or an effect effect that changes the display mode of the hold display or the active display, may be used.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode suggesting the effect by the characters (“special”, “special?”, “NEXT”, “SP”) is “second specific mode”. May indicate the contents of the effect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, 5 seconds after the start of the special zone effect, the pseudo continuous effect, or the super reach effect, the display of the specific display in the second specific mode is followed by the specific display in the second specific mode. Is performed when the effect of the content suggested by is performed, but is not limited thereto. For example, it may be a time point when the effect of the content suggested by the specific display in the second specific mode is executed, or at a timing before and after the time point.

  Further, in the present embodiment, each of the effects is started when “the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode is performed after the specific display is displayed in the second specific mode”. It was decided to unify after 5 seconds, but it is not limited to this. For example, different timings are set in advance for each production of the suggestion contents (for example, if the production of the suggestion contents is a pseudo series, 3 seconds after the start of the pseudo series, and if the production of the suggestion contents is super reach, the super reach starts. (Four seconds after), or one of a plurality of timings may be determined by lottery. In the case of determining by lottery, it may be different depending on whether or not the lottery ratio is a big hit. Thereby, a sense of expectation can be given by the timing at which the display mode of the hold display or the active display changes from the second specific mode to the first specific mode.

  In the present embodiment, the pending change pattern and the change timing are determined by different lotteries, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of pieces of data including information of the pending change pattern and the change timing (that is, data in which the display mode is changed at which timing is determined in advance) are provided. Whether to perform the determination may be determined by lottery.

  Further, the change timing of the display mode of the hold display or the active display may not be determined in advance. May be determined by lottery. Further, the display mode after the change may not be determined in advance. For example, the display mode to be changed may be determined by lottery at the change timing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the display mode of the hold display or the active display, the normal display mode and the effect suggestion display mode are determined by different lotteries, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of change patterns of the display mode including the normal display mode and the effect suggestion display mode are provided, and it may be determined which of the change patterns changes the display mode.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the effect suggestion display mode, the display is not displayed in the normal display mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the hold display or the active display in the normal display mode is to be displayed as an image having a lower display priority than the hold display or the active display in the effect suggestion display mode, the hold display or the effect suggestion display mode is displayed. Even during the active display, the same display as in the present embodiment can be performed without interrupting the display control of the normal display mode (change control of the display mode at the change timing).

  Further, in the present embodiment, even if the specific display is displayed in the second specific mode, the effect execution unit may not execute the effect of the content suggested by the specific display in the second specific mode (see the present embodiment). In the example, the effect control microcomputer 100 can display the hold display or the active display in the second special suggestion mode even when the special zone effect is not performed, by performing the step S3715 after the Y of the step S3714. That is, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the second special suggestion mode, the special zone effect, which is the suggestion content, may not be executed.) Even if the effect of the content suggested by the specific display is not executed, the display mode of the specific display displayed in the second specific mode is first specified. (In this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the steps S4706 to S4708 to display the hold display or the active display in the second special suggestion mode. Even when the special zone effect is not executed, the color can be changed to “red” which is the first specific mode.) Thus, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation when the effect of the content suggested by the specific display in the second specific mode is not performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the specific display means can display the specific display in the first specific mode having a higher degree of expectation than the second specific mode (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 A hold change pattern for displaying "red" as the first specific mode is selected at the ratio shown in FIG. 39B (step S3701), while displaying the second special suggestion mode as the second specific mode is shown in FIG. By determining at the ratio shown in (B) (step S3715), the hold display or the active display is performed in “red”, which has a higher degree of reliability for the 15R probability change jackpot or the 8R probability change hit than the second special suggestion mode. Can be displayed). Thereby, an expectation for the first specific mode can be increased.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the specific display means can display the specific display in the first specific mode having a higher degree of expectation than the effect of the content suggested by the specific display in the second specific mode (this example). Then, effect control microcomputer 100 selects the pending change pattern displaying “red” in the first specific mode at the ratio shown in FIG. 39B (step S3701), while suggesting the second specific mode. By determining whether or not to execute the special zone effect, which is the content, at the ratio shown in FIG. 36A (step S3505), the reliability of the 15R probability change hit or the 8R probability change hit is higher than that of the special zone effect. With “red”, a hold display or an active display can be displayed). Thereby, an expectation for the first specific mode can be increased.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the specific display means can further change the display mode of the specific display changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode. If P04 is selected as the change pattern and Active is selected as the change timing, the steps S4705, S4708, S4711, and S4714 are executed and then the steps S4701 and S4702 are executed to display the hold display or the active display. Can be changed from the effect suggestion display mode to “red” and further changed to “gold”). Thus, the sense of expectation for the display mode of the specific display after changing to the first specific mode can be increased.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the specific display means includes a plurality of types of second specific modes having different suggestion contents (in this example, a first special suggestion mode, a second special suggestion mode, a pseudo continuous suggestion mode, and a SP suggestion mode). The specific display can be displayed by changing the display mode of the specific display from the second specific mode to the first specific mode at a different rate based on the type of the second specific mode. The microcomputer 100 determines whether or not to display in each of the effect suggestion display modes using the tables shown in FIGS. 41A to 41D, so that the pending change pattern including “red” (other than P01) ), The ratio of which effect suggestion display mode is to be displayed is different, so that it is changed to “red” at a different ratio depending on the type of effect suggestion display mode.) did. Thereby, the display mode of the specific display can be noticed.

  In the present embodiment, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the pseudo continuous suggestion mode, the pseudo continuous production is always executed with the corresponding fluctuation. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the hold display or the active display is displayed in the suggestion mode, there may be provided a case where the pseudo continuous effect is executed and a case where the pseudo continuous effect is not executed. Similarly, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the SP suggestion mode, a case where the super reach effect is executed and a case where the super reach effect is not executed may be provided.

  In this embodiment, since it is possible to recognize (pre-read) that the fluctuation is accompanied by one or two pseudo runs based on the fluctuation category command received at the time of the start winning, one time. Alternatively, the pseudo-suggestion suggestion mode can be executed with a change involving two pseudo runs as a notification target, but the pseudo-slice suggestion mode may be executed even with a change involving three pseudo runs as a notification target. .

  In addition, the change mode in the pending change pattern includes not only the normal display mode but also the effect suggestion display mode, and the change mode to the normal display mode and the effect suggestion display mode may be collectively determined. Good. For example, a pending change pattern that changes from “white” to the first special suggestion display mode, a pending change pattern that changes to “red” from the second special suggestion display mode, or a change from “white” to the pseudo continuous suggestion mode, Further, there are provided a plurality of hold change patterns such as a hold change pattern that changes to "red" and a hold change pattern that changes from "white" to the SP suggestion display mode, and selects which hold change pattern to use. It may be that.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the holding change pattern is determined using the common holding change pattern determination table (see FIG. 39 (A)) for any winning determination result, but the present invention is not limited to this. Not something. For example, a plurality of pending change pattern determination tables may be provided, and the pending change pattern may be determined using the pending change pattern determination table corresponding to the received fluctuation category command.

  For example, when a change category command indicating that the change is a loss change accompanied by a pseudo-run is received, the above-described pending change patterns P01 to P05 and the white change to a pseudo-run suggestion mode, and further to “red” The pending change pattern may be determined using a pending change pattern determination table that includes a changing pending change pattern and a pending change pattern that changes from a pseudo-continuous suggestion mode to “red”. In addition, for example, when a fluctuation category command indicating that it is a jackpot fluctuation accompanied by a super reach is received, the above-described hold change patterns P01 to P05 and the white display change to the second special suggestion display mode. A hold change pattern that changes to "red", a hold change pattern that changes from "white" to the SP suggestion display mode, a hold change that changes from the first special suggestion display mode to the SP suggestion display mode, and further changes to "red" The suspension change pattern may be determined using a suspension change pattern determination table including the change pattern.

  In addition, although the description is omitted in the present embodiment, it is determined at the time of the start winning that the fluctuation is accompanied by the pseudo-run including a plurality of re-changes, and it is determined that the hold display is displayed in the pseudo-run suggestion mode. In this case, it may be possible to determine at which re-change timing the pseudo display mode changes to the normal display mode (for example, “red” or “gold”). For example, if it is determined that the display mode is changed at the first re-change timing, the execution of the pseudo-link including one re-change is suggested by the pseudo-link suggestion mode, while the second re-change is indicated. When it is determined that the display mode is changed at the change timing, the execution of the pseudo run including the two re-changes is suggested by the pseudo run suggesting mode. That is, when it is determined at the time of the start winning that the fluctuation is accompanied by a pseudo run including a plurality of re-changes, and it is determined to display the hold display in the pseudo-run suggestion mode, the pseudo run including one re-change is performed. It may be possible to determine whether the execution of a run is to be suggested or the execution of a pseudo-run including two re-variations is to be suggested.

  Also, a plurality of display modes may be provided as the pseudo-continuous suggestion mode, and the number of times of re-change may be suggested depending on which type of pseudo-continuous suggestion mode displays the hold display. For example, if the pseudo-link suggestion modes A to C are provided and the pseudo-link is a one-time re-change, the hold display is easily displayed in the pseudo-link suggestion mode A, and the re-change is performed twice. In the case of a pseudo-run, it is easy to display the hold display in the pseudo-run suggestion mode B, and in the case of a pseudo run that performs three re-variations, it is easy to display the hold display in the pseudo-run suggestion mode C. Is also good.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the special zone effect is started three seconds after the start of the fluctuation, but the start timing (entry timing) of the special zone effect is not limited to this. For example, the special zone effect may be started at the timing of starting the fluctuation or at the predetermined timing during the execution of the predetermined effect (for example, the super reach effect). In addition, in the case of a change involving a pseudo run, the special zone effect may be started at the first re-change timing or the second re-change timing. Further, at which timing among the plurality of timings the special zone effect is started may be determined by lottery.

  In addition, the first effect device includes a first effect device and a second effect device, can display a specific display using the first effect device, can execute a change effect that can change a display mode of the specific effect, and the first effect device. A first change effect in which the display mode of the specific display can be changed using the first display device, and a second change effect in which the display mode of the specific display can be changed by interlocking the first effect device and the second effect device. It is possible that the degree of expectation may be different depending on whether the first change effect or the second change effect is executed and the display mode of the specific display changes. Specifically, description will be given using the following first modification. The description of the same parts as those in the above-described embodiment will be omitted.

  In the first modification, below the effect display device 9, there is provided a sub-display device 9 </ b> S formed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) smaller in size than the liquid crystal display device (LCD) constituting the effect display device 9. Have been. The display screen of the sub-display device 9S is provided with an area (total storage storage display unit) 18c for displaying the total number (total suspension storage number) which is the sum of the first and second suspension storage numbers. I have.

  The display screen of the sub display device 9S is provided with an active display area 9A in which an active display is displayed.

  In the first modification, a pending change announcement effect can be executed as the prefetch announcement effect. The hold change announcement effect is an effect of changing the hold display to a special display mode (in this example, a blue or red round display) different from the normal mode (in this example, a black round display). In the first modification, when the hold change notice effect is executed, the display of the hold display is started in a normal mode at the timing when the start winning is generated, and thereafter, the operation effect (the operation described later) is performed at the timing of the shift of the hold display. The effect in which the effect A or the effect effect B) is executed to change the hold display of the notification target to any special display mode is executed (thus, in the first modification, at least the effect Both the part where the effect is performed and the part where the hold display of the notice object changes) are included.) When the display mode of the hold display changes due to execution of the hold change announcement effect, the hold memory of the advance notice is exhausted at the timing when the change display of the advance notice is started, and the special display mode of the advance notice target is exhausted. The suspended display is deleted, and the active display in the special display mode is displayed in the active display area 9A. When the variable display of the notice object is completed, the active display of the special display mode is deleted. Therefore, in the first modification, when the pending change announcement effect is executed, the display of the special display mode (holding display, active display) is continued until the variable display of the announcement target ends.

  In the first modification, when a start winning is generated, the effect control CPU 101 uses a suspension change announcement effect determination table for deciding the presence or absence and type of the suspension change announcement effect in the suspension display control process (step S800C). Then, a lottery process based on the random number is performed to determine the presence / absence and type of the pending change announcement effect. The effect control CPU 101 executes the set change notice announcement effect in the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a pending change announcement effect determination table in the first modification. As shown in FIG. 52, in Modification Example 1, in the hold change announcement effect determination table, determination values are assigned to no hold change announcement effect and to hold change announcement effects 1 to 6, respectively. Further, as shown in FIG. 52, in the first modification, there are six types of the pending change announcement effects 1 to 6 as the pending change announcement effects.

  The hold change announcement effect 1 is to simply execute the action effect A at the timing of the shift of the hold display, and not to change the display mode of the hold display in the normal mode (black circle display in this example). It is. In addition, in the hold change announcement effect 2, only the effect effect B is executed at the timing of the shift of the hold display, and the hold change that does not change the display mode of the hold display in the normal mode (black circle display in this example). It is a notice production. Therefore, in the first modification, when the hold change notice effect 1 or the hold change notice effect 2 is executed, only the action effect (action effect A or action effect B) is executed, and the display mode of the hold display is changed. Since it does not change, it corresponds to the so-called gaseous pending change announcement effect.

  The hold change notice effect 3 is a hold change notice effect in which the action effect A is executed at the timing of the shift of the hold display and the display mode of the hold display is changed to a blue circle display. The hold change announcement effect 4 is a hold change announcement effect in which the action effect B is executed at the timing of the shift of the hold display and the display mode of the hold display is changed to a blue circle display. The hold change announcement effect 5 is a hold change announcement effect in which the action effect A is executed at the timing of the shift of the hold display and the display mode of the hold display is changed to a red circle display. The hold change notice effect 6 is a hold change notice effect in which the action effect B is executed at the timing of the shift of the hold display and the display mode of the hold display is changed to a red circle display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 52, in the first modification, there are two types of action effects A and B as action effects executed in the pending change announcement effect. The action effect A is an effect effect performed using only the sub display device 9S (sub display device). The action effect B is an effect effect performed using the effect display device 9 (main display device) and the sub display device 9S (sub display device). In addition, when performing the action effect, instead of using only the liquid crystal display device, for example, a predetermined change sound is output from the speaker at the timing when the hold display or the active display changes, or a lamp or LED is lit. For example, an effect by another effect device may be accompanied.

  As shown in FIG. 52, in the first modification, when the determination result indicated by the variable category command is out of non-reach or super reach, the determination result indicated by the variable category command is a super-reach big hit. In some cases, the execution of the pending change announcement effect may be determined.

  In the first modification, the hold change announcement effect is an effect in which the display mode of the hold display can be changed using the auxiliary display device 9S (in this example, the hold change announcement effect 1 with the action effect A, the hold change announcement effect 3). , And the on-hold change notice effect 5 (hereinafter also referred to as a first on-hold change notice effect) and an effect in which the display mode of the hold display can be changed by interlocking the effect display device 9 and the sub-display device 9S (this example). 52 is roughly divided into a hold change notice effect 2 with the action effect B, a hold change notice effect 4 and a hold change notice effect 6. (hereinafter also referred to as a second hold change notice effect). As shown in the figure, in the case of the super reach jackpot, the rate at which the second hold change notice effect is executed is relatively higher than the rate at which the first hold change notice effect is executed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 52, in the case of non-reach loss or super-reach loss, the rate at which the second hold change notice effect is executed is relatively higher than the rate at which the first hold change notice effect is executed. It is lower. Therefore, in the first modification, when the second hold change announcement effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display changes, the first hold change announcement effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display changes. In comparison, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is high.

  Further, in the first modification, the display mode of the hold display is changed in a case where the hold display of the notice target changes to a blue circle display or a case where the hold display changes to a red circle display. As shown in FIG. 52, when the first pending change notice effect is executed, the rate of change to blue circle display is relatively higher than the rate of change to red circle display. . Further, as shown in FIG. 52, when the second pending change notice effect is executed, the rate of change to the red circle display becomes relatively higher than the rate of change to the blue circle display. I have. Therefore, in the first modification, the hold display of the notification target is changed to a blue circle depending on whether the first hold change notification effect or the second hold change notification effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display changes. The ratio in which the display mode changes to the display mode or the red circular display mode is different.

  Further, in the first modification, when the hold change notice effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display does not change (that is, the gasket hold change notice effect (hold change notice effect 1 and hold change notice effect 2) is executed). If you do). Further, as shown in FIG. 52, the rate at which the first hold change notice effect 1 (in this example, the hold change notice effect 1) of the gaseous is executed is higher than the ratio of the second hold change notice effect of the gasse (in this example, It is higher than the rate at which the pending change announcement effect 2) is executed. Therefore, in Modification Example 1, the rate at which the display mode of the hold display of the notification target changes varies depending on whether the first hold change notice effect or the second hold change notice effect is executed. More specifically, in the first modification, the second hold change notice effect (in this example, the hold change notice effect 2) of the gasse is the first hold change notice effect of the gaseous (in this example, the hold change notice effect). Since the execution ratio is lower than 1), the rate at which the hold display of the notice object changes when the second hold change notice effect is executed relatively than when the first hold change notice effect is executed. Is high. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in the first modification, and conversely, when the first hold change notice effect is executed, the case where the second hold change notice effect is executed is relatively relatively smaller. You may comprise so that the rate of change of hold display may become high.

  It should be noted that the method of allocating the pending change announcement effect is not limited to that shown in the first modification. For example, in the stage before the change of the hold display, when it is configured that there is a case where it is possible to recognize which of the hold displays in the combined hold storage display unit 18c is the target of the notice and a case where it is not possible to recognize the hold display, The execution of the first hold change announcement effect or the second hold change announcement effect may be determined at different rates depending on whether the hold display can be recognized or not. In this case, for example, the display is different from the final change mode (in this example, a blue or red circle display) in the hold change notice effect, but is different from the normal mode (for example, a white circle display). In the case where a hold display (so-called white hold display) indicating that the display mode is changed is configured to be able to be displayed, which of the hold displays is notified depending on whether the white hold display is displayed or not. It can be inferred whether it can be the target. Therefore, the execution of the first hold change notice effect or the second hold change notice effect may be determined at different rates depending on whether or not the white hold display is displayed.

  Further, in the first modification, the case where the display mode of the hold display is changed only once in the hold change notice effect is shown, but the display mode of the hold display may be configured to be changeable a plurality of times. It may be configured to be changeable a plurality of times including after the active display). In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of changes, the timing of each change, and the change pattern of each display mode (color, etc.) are collectively determined. Further, for example, in the case of being configured to be changeable a plurality of times including after the active display, the change pattern including the change after the active display is collectively determined in the pending change announcement effect determination processing. Alternatively, in the hold change announcement effect determination process, only the change pattern of the hold display is determined, and the change pattern after the active display is determined by the effect symbol change start process at the start of the change. May be.

  Further, in the first modified example, the case where the action effect is always executed in the hold change notice effect is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to such a case, and the case where the display mode of the hold display changes without performing the effect effect is performed. It may be configured so that there is. In the case of executing such a pending change announcement effect without such an effect effect, when the display mode of the hold display (including the active display) can be changed a plurality of times as described above, The configuration may be such that the effect effect is executed at any one of the plurality of change timings, and the number of executions of the effect effect is also determined.

  Further, in the first modified example, when the action effect B is executed, the degree of expectation (reliability) with respect to the big hit is higher than when the effect effect A is executed, or a so-called gasp suspension change is performed. Although the case where the degree of advantage is high, such as a small ratio of a notice effect, is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, conversely, the configuration may be such that the degree of advantage is lower when the action effect B is executed than when the action effect A is executed.

  Next, a description will be given of a specific example of the effect form of the pending change notice effect. FIG. 53 and FIG. 54 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the production mode of the pending change announcement production in the first modification. Among them, FIG. 53 shows a specific example of the effect form of the first hold change notice effect (hold change notice effect 1, hold change notice effect 3 and hold change notice effect 5). FIG. 54 shows a specific example of an effect mode of the second hold change notice effect (hold change notice effect 2, hold change notice effect 4 and hold change notice effect 6). Note that in FIGS. 53 and 54, the mode of the effect screen changes in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

  First, with reference to FIG. 53, a description will be given of an effect mode of the first reservation change notice effect. In the example shown in FIG. 53 (1), it is assumed that the effect display device 9 (main display device) is performing a variable display of a left-middle-right effect symbol, and the sub-display device 9S (sub-display device) has an active display. A predetermined display (active display) is displayed in the area 9A corresponding to the fluctuation display during the current execution, and two suspension displays are displayed on the total suspension storage display unit 18c (that is, two suspension memories are displayed). Accumulate). Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (2), it is assumed that a new start winning prize has occurred, and the number of pending displays has increased by one to three in the total pending storage display unit 18c. Also, it is assumed that it is determined to execute the first pending change announcement effect based on the occurrence of a new start winning. In the example shown in FIG. 53, it is assumed that it is determined that the hold change notice effect 3 or the hold change notice effect 5 is to be executed. Then, it is assumed that the variable display is ended as shown in FIG. 53 (3), one hold storage is exhausted, and the next variable display is started as shown in FIG. 53 (4). Further, as shown in FIG. 53 (4), it is assumed that the reserved display is reduced by one to two in the combined reserved storage display unit 18c due to the digestion of one reserved storage.

  Next, at the start timing of the action effect A (for example, one second after the start of the fluctuation), the effect effect A is started on the sub-display device 9S (sub-display device) as shown in FIG. In the present example, as shown in FIG. 53 (4), as the action effect A, the arrow 200 flies in the direction of the active display area 9A and the combined hold storage display unit 18c on the sub display device 9S (sub display device). An effect of any mode is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 53 (5), in the combined pending storage display unit 18c, an effect is performed in such a manner that the arrow 200 hits the pending display to be notified.

  Then, at the end timing of the action effect A (for example, 6 seconds after the start of fluctuation), the action effect A is ended on the sub display device 9S (sub display device) as shown in FIG. The display mode of the hold display is changed. For example, if the hold change announcement effect 3 is executed, the hold indication of the announcement target is changed to a blue circle in FIG. 53 (6), and if the hold change announcement effect 5 is executed, In 53 (6), the suspension display of the notice object is changed to a red circular display.

  In the example shown in FIG. 53, a case is shown in which the hold change notice effect 3 or the hold change notice effect 5 is executed as the first hold change notice effect. 53 (4) and (5), only the action effect A is executed. In FIG. 53 (6), the hold display is changed to the normal mode (black circle display in this example). No (a so-called gaseous first pending change announcement effect). In this case, for example, an effect may be performed such that the arrow flies in the same manner as in FIG. 53, but an effect may be performed such that the arrow is not hit because the hold display is deflected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, a description will be given of an effect mode of the second pending change notice effect. In the example shown in FIG. 54 (1), it is assumed that the effect display device 9 (main display device) is performing a variable display of the left-middle-right effect symbol, and the sub-display device 9S (sub-display device) has an active display. A predetermined display (active display) is displayed in the area 9A corresponding to the fluctuation display during the current execution, and two suspension displays are displayed on the total suspension storage display unit 18c (that is, two suspension memories are displayed). Accumulate). Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (2), it is assumed that a new start prize has occurred, and the number of pending displays has increased by one to three in the total pending storage display unit 18c. Further, it is assumed that it is determined that the second pending change announcement effect is to be executed based on the occurrence of a new start winning. In the example shown in FIG. 54, it is assumed that it is determined to execute the pending change announcement effect 4 or the pending change announcement effect 6. Then, it is assumed that the variable display is ended as shown in FIG. 54 (3), one hold storage is exhausted, and the next variable display is started as shown in FIG. 54 (4). Further, as shown in FIG. 54 (4), it is assumed that the reserved display is reduced by one to two in the combined reserved storage display unit 18c by consuming one reserved storage.

  Next, at the start timing of the action effect B (for example, one second after the start of fluctuation), as shown in FIG. 54 (4), the effect display device 9 (main display device) and the sub display device 9S (sub display device) are activated. The action effect B used is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 54 (4), as the action effect B, the effect display is performed in the direction of the active display area 9A of the sub-display device 9S (sub-display device) and the combined hold storage display unit 18c. In the device 9 (main display device), an effect in which the arrow 201 flies is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 54 (5), the arrow 201 flies from the effect display device 9 (men display device) to the sub-display device 9S (sub-display device), and the sub-display device 9S (sub-display device). In the combined hold storage display unit 18c of the (device), an effect is performed in such a manner that the arrow 201 hits the hold display of the notice target.

  Then, at the end timing of the action effect B (for example, 6 seconds after the start of fluctuation), as shown in FIG. 54 (6), the effect display device 9 (main display device) and the sub display device 9S (sub display device) are activated. The action effect B used is ended, and the display mode of the hold display of the notice target is changed. For example, if the pending change announcement effect 4 is executed, the suspension display of the announcement target is changed to a blue circle display in FIG. 54 (6), and if the suspension change announcement effect 6 is executed, In 54 (6), the suspension display of the notice object is changed to a red circular display.

  In the example shown in FIG. 54, a case is shown in which the hold change notice effect 4 or the hold change notice effect 6 is executed as the second hold change notice effect, but when the hold change notice effect 2 is executed, 54 (4) and (5), only the action effect B is executed. In FIG. 54 (6), the hold display is changed to the normal mode (black circle display in this example). No (a so-called gaseous second pending change announcement effect). In this case, for example, an effect may be performed such that the arrow flies in the same manner as in FIG. 54, but an effect may be performed such that the arrow is not hit because the hold display is deflected.

  As described above, according to the first modification, the first effect device (in this example, the sub-display device 9S (sub-display device)) and the second effect device (in this example, the effect display device 9 (main display device 9S)). Display device)), a specific display (in this example, a hold display) can be displayed using the first effect device (in this example, the secondary display device 9S has a combined hold storage display unit 18c). A change effect that can change the display mode of the display (in this example, a pending change notice effect) can be executed. In this case, the first change effect that can change the display mode of the specific display using the first effect device (in this example, the first hold change notice effect (hold change notice effect 1 with action effect A, hold change notice effect 1) 3, a pending change notice effect 5)) and a second change effect in which the display mode of the specific display can be changed by interlocking the first effect device and the second effect device (in this example, the second pending change notice) Effects (holding change notice effect 2 with action effect B, hold change notice effect 4, hold change notice effect 6)). Then, the degree of expectation differs depending on whether the first change effect or the second change effect has been executed and the display mode of the specific display has changed (in this example, as shown in FIG. 52, the second reserved change notice) When the effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display changes, the advantage (reliability) with respect to the big hit is larger than in the case where the first hold change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display changes. high). Therefore, by enabling a plurality of types of change effects, the effect of the change effects can be improved. Also, since the degree of expectation differs depending on which change effect is executed, the player can be interested in which change effect is executed.

  In the first modification, the hold display is described as “specific display”, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the corresponding display (active display) corresponding to the variable display may be “specific display”. Specifically, during the execution of the variable display, the first display device can be used to display a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display (for example, an active display corresponding to the currently executed variable display) (for example, the secondary display). The display device 9S has an active display area in which an active display is displayed), a change effect in which the display mode of the corresponding display can be changed (for example, the active display is a special display different from the normal mode (for example, a black circle display)) A first change effect (for example, an active display change notice effect that changes to a mode (for example, a blue or red circle display) to change the display mode of the corresponding display using the first effect device). An effect in which the display mode of the active display can be changed using the auxiliary display device 9S, a first active display change notice effect), and a correspondence table in which the first effect device and the second effect device are linked. (For example, a second active display change notice effect in which the display mode of the active display can be changed by interlocking the effect display device 9 and the sub-display device 9S). The degree of expectation is different depending on whether the first change effect or the second change effect is executed and the display mode of the corresponding display changes (for example, the second active display change notice effect is executed and the active When the display mode of the display changes, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit may be higher than when the first active display change announcement effect is executed and the display mode of the active display changes. Good. Therefore, by enabling a plurality of types of change effects, the effect of the change effects can be improved. Also, since the degree of expectation differs depending on which change effect is executed, the player can be interested in which change effect is executed.

  Note that, in the first modification, both the hold change notice effect and the active display change notice effect can be executed as the change effect (however, in one variable display, the hold change notice effect and the active display change notice effect are performed in an overlapping manner). The gaming machine may be configured such that only one of the pending change announcement effect and the active display change announcement effect can be executed as the change effect (the other effect is not executed at all). You may.

  In the first modification, for example, when the gaming state, the effect state, and various setting states in the gaming machine are specific states, only one of the hold change notice effect and the active display change notice effect is executed. In a state different from the specific state, the other effect may be executed. Further, in further different states, both the hold change announcement effect and the active display change announcement effect may be configured to be executable, and various configurations are conceivable.

  Further, in the first modification, the case where the first effect device is the sub-display device 9S (sub-display device) and the second effect device is the effect display device 9 (main display device) has been described. The second effect device is not limited to such a liquid crystal display device. For example, the first effect device and the second effect device may be constituted by movable movable members (effect objects). Further, for example, the liquid crystal display device may be configured to be movable, and the first effect device and the second effect device may be configured by the movable liquid crystal display device. Further, as the effect device, not only a liquid crystal display device and a movable member (effect object), but also a light emitting device such as a lamp or an LED, or a sound output device such as a speaker may be used.

  Further, in the first modification, the case where two effect devices, the effect display device 9 (main display device) and the sub-display device 9S (sub display device), are used, but not only two but also three or more effects The device may be configured to be able to execute a pending change notice effect and an active display change notice effect.

  As an example of using three effect devices, for example, an effect effect may be configured to be executable using three liquid crystal display devices. In this case, for example, the first liquid crystal display device is configured to be movable, and the arrow is displayed while the first liquid crystal display device is moved, and the arrow is displayed on the sub display via the main display device. The effect presentation may be performed in such a manner as to fly toward the active display or the hold display of the device.

  Further, for example, as three effect devices, an effect effect may be executed using a liquid crystal display device, an LED, and an effect accessory. In this case, for example, when the stage is moved, the LEDs sequentially emit light from the LEDs located near the moved stage, and when the light reaches the LEDs located near the liquid crystal display device, The action effect may be executed in such a manner that the display mode of the active display or the hold display on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device changes.

  In addition, in the case where the action effect is configured to be executable using three or more effect devices as described above, the degree of advantage increases as the effect effect is executed in cooperation with a larger number of effect devices (for example, It may be configured such that the ratio of the gaseous effect is reduced or changed to an advantageous change mode). Conversely, the configuration may be such that the greater the number of the effect devices, the more the effect effect is executed in conjunction with the effect effect.

  In the first modification, the “second change effect in which the display mode of the corresponding display can be changed by a mode in which the first effect device and the second effect device are linked” refers to the first effect device and the second effect device. Is to perform the second change effect by acting in some manner. For example, “the second change effect in which the display mode of the corresponding display can be changed by interlocking the first effect device and the second effect device” means, as shown in FIG. 54, the effect display device 9 (main display). On the display screen of the (device), an image such as an arrow is displayed so as to fly toward the sub-display device 9S (sub-display device) that displays the hold display and the active display, and acts on the hold display and the active display. The effect display may be performed as follows. In addition, for example, in the case of including a staging accessory in place of the main display device, by moving the staging accessory toward the hold display or the active display, to act by a physical operation. It may be something to show.

  Further, in the first modification, there are a plurality of types of display modes (for example, a blue circular display and a red circular display) in which the hold display can be changed, and either the first change effect or the second change effect is executed. Depending on whether the display mode of the hold display has changed, the ratio of which display mode the hold display changes to differs (for example, which one of the first hold change advance notice effect and the second hold change advance effect is executed) Depending on whether the display mode of the hold display has changed, the ratio of whether the hold display of the advance notice changes to the blue round display or the red round display may be different). Therefore, the change mode differs depending on which change effect is executed, so that the player can be interested in which change effect is executed.

  There are a plurality of types of display modes in which the corresponding display can be changed (for example, a blue circular display and a red circular display). Is different depending on which of the display modes the corresponding display changes (for example, whether the first active display change announcement effect or the second active display change announcement effect is executed and the active display is changed). Depending on whether the display mode has changed, the ratio of whether the active display changes to the blue round display mode or the red round display mode may be different). Therefore, the change mode differs depending on which change effect is executed, so that the player can be interested in which change effect is executed.

  Further, in the first modification, a case where the display mode of the hold display does not change even when the change effect is executed (for example, a case where a hold change advance notice effect (hold change notice effect 1 and a hold change notice effect 2) of a gasp is executed) ), Depending on whether the first change effect or the second change effect is executed, the rate at which the display mode of the hold display changes (for example, the second hold change notice effect is relatively executed) In this case, the rate of change of the hold display of the notice target may be higher than in the case where the first hold change notice effect is executed). Therefore, the rate at which the display mode of the hold display changes depending on which change effect is executed, and the player can be interested in which change effect is executed.

  Further, there is a case where the display mode of the corresponding display does not change even if the change effect is executed (for example, a case where the active display change notice effect of the gaseous display is executed), and either the first change effect or the second change effect is executed. (For example, when the second active display change notice effect is executed, the first active display change notice effect is executed). The rate of change in the active display is higher than in the case). Therefore, the rate at which the display mode of the corresponding display changes depends on which change effect is executed, so that the player can be interested in which change effect is executed.

  Further, in Modification Example 1, when the second change effect is executed and the display mode is changed, the degree of expectation is higher than when the first change effect is executed and the display mode is changed (for example, When the second hold change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display changes, the degree of expectation for the big hit is compared with the case where the first hold change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display changes. When the second active display change announcement effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display changes, the first active display change announcement effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display changes. The degree of expectation (reliability) for the jackpot is higher than that in the case where it is performed.) Therefore, the expectation of the player can be improved by executing the second change effect.

  In addition, when the display form of the hold display or the active display is changed by the execution of the second hold change notice effect or the second active display change notice effect, the first hold change notice effect or the first active display change notice effect is executed. As compared with the case where the display mode of the hold display or the active display is changed, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit may be increased, and conversely, the first hold change announcement effect or the first active display When the display mode of the hold display or the active display is changed by the execution of the change announcement effect, the second hold change announcement effect or the second active display change announcement effect is executed, and the display manner of the hold display or the active display is changed. As compared with the case, the configuration may be such that the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit is higher.

  In the first modification, the big hit expectation may be higher when the second hold change announcement effect or the second active display change announcement effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display or the active display is changed. However, not only the big hit expectation, but also the expectation for the probability change big hit, the reach expectation, and the expectation for the occurrence of the pseudo-run may be increased. Further, for example, the degree of expectation regarding whether the hold display or the active display changes or the degree of expectation regarding whether the hold display or the active display changes in a case where there are a plurality of types of change modes may be increased. You may.

  According to the first modification, the second effect device is the main display device (in the present example, the effect display device 9 (main display device)), and the first effect device is the sub-display device (in the example, , Sub-display device 9S (sub-display device)). Therefore, by using the main display device and the sub-display device, the effect of the change effect can be improved.

  Further, a common change effect can be executed when the display mode of the hold display is changed and when the display mode of the corresponding display is changed (for example, as shown in FIG. 53, the first hold change announcement effect is executed). And the first active display change notice effect is executed, the effect effect A is executed in a similar effect manner, and as shown in Fig. 54, the second hold change notice effect is executed. In the case where the second active display change announcement effect is executed, the operation effect B is executed in a similar effect mode, but strictly speaking, the arrow hits depending on which of the hold display or the active display is the object of the announcement. Because the destinations are different, some of them have a common effect.) Therefore, it can be noticed which of the hold display and the corresponding display changes, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the first modification, the action effect A executed when the first hold change notice effect is executed and the case where the first active display change notice effect is executed, and the case where the second hold change notice effect is executed, Both the action effect B executed in the second active display change notice effect and the effect effect B executed in the same effect mode may be executed, or only one of them may be executed in the same mode. Is also good. For example, when the action effect A is executed in the same effect mode in the case where the first hold change notice effect is executed and the case where the first active display change notice effect is executed, the second hold change notice effect is executed. The second effect and the second active display change notice effect may be configured to execute the effect effect B in a different effect mode. Conversely, for example, the action effect B is executed in the same effect mode when the second hold change notice effect is executed and when the second active display change notice effect is executed, while the first hold change notice is executed. The effect effect A having different effect modes may be executed between the case where the effect is executed and the first active display change notice effect.

  In addition, after performing the action effect, the specific display can be changed to a display mode indicating the reliability of the big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after executing the action effect, the specific display may be changeable to a display mode (for example, the above-described second specific mode) indicating the content of the effect.

  Also, a gaming machine that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and displays a specific display indicating a degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state by a display mode, and is controlled to an advantageous state. In the execution period of one variable display, a specific notification indicating that the display mode of the specific display is changed to be controlled to the advantageous state after the predetermined notification indicating that the display is not controlled to the advantageous state is performed. It may be performed. Specifically, description will be made using the following modified example 2. The description of the same parts as those in the above-described embodiment will be omitted.

  In the second modification, the above-described active display may be referred to as “present display”. Further, in the second modification, the above-mentioned hold change pattern may be referred to as a “holding and other effect pattern”. In the second modification, white, yellow, red, and iridescent colors are provided as the display mode of the hold display and the display mode of the current display. The big hit expectation is rainbow> red> yellow> white.

  In the second modification, the effect display device 9 described above may be referred to as an “image display device 5”. In the display area of the image display device 5, for example, a hold display area 5H and a current display area 5K are arranged.

  In the hold display area 5H, the variable display number of decorative symbols corresponding to the special figure game is displayed so as to be specified. For example, in the hold display area 5H, a number of hold displays corresponding to the number of holds of the variable display of the decorative symbols are displayed in a manner such that the winning order (digestion order) can be recognized. More specifically, a hold display of a decorative symbol corresponding to the first special figure game (first special symbol change) and a hold display of a decorative symbol corresponding to the second special figure game (second special symbol change) are awarded. They are arranged in the order and displayed in the hold display area 5H. In addition, in the hold display area 5H, each time a variable display of a decorative symbol corresponding to the special figure game is started, the hold display corresponding to the started variable display is erased (digested), and the hold erased is deleted. If there is another hold display in addition to the display, the display position of the other hold display is moved (shifted) to the side of the hold display (the side of the present display area 5K) from which the display is erased.

  In the current display area 5K, a current display (sometimes called a digest display, an active display, etc.) is displayed. The current display is a display that is displayed in accordance with the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the digested hold display (displayed in place of the hold display that is digested when the hold display is digested).

  FIG. 55 is a diagram illustrating a display example of the image display device according to the second modification. In FIG. 55, regarding the display mode of the hold display and the display mode of the present display, white circles, yellow squares, red double circles, and rainbow colors are represented by stars. Further, at the time of winning the hold display HH1 shown in FIG. 55 (A), “PB3 (super reach (big hit))” is determined as the variable category of the variable display corresponding to the hold display HH1, and the hold corresponding to the hold display HH1 is set. It is assumed that “HP5” has been determined as an equal effect pattern.

  The fluctuation category “PB3” is a fluctuation category of super reach (big hit). The fluctuation category “PB3” includes a fluctuation pattern “PB3-1” that develops from normal B to super reach A (hereinafter referred to as “super A”) and becomes a big hit, and a normal B to super reach B (hereinafter “super B”). The variation pattern "PB3-2" which develops into a jackpot, the variation pattern "PB3-3" which develops from normal B to super A and becomes a relief jackpot, and the variation pattern "PB3-3" which develops from normal B to super B and becomes a relief jackpot The variation pattern “PB3-4” belongs to the following. Note that the rescue jackpot is a jackpot in which a big hit is reported after a loss is once reported. Loss once reported before the jackpot notification is also referred to as temporary loss. Therefore, the rescue jackpot is also referred to as the temporary jackpot after the loss. As another variation pattern, a variation pattern “PA3-1” which develops from normal B to super A and becomes out of order is provided.

  The hold etc. effect pattern “HP5” is a hold etc. effect pattern in which the display mode of the hold display is white, the display mode of this time display (before reach) is yellow, and the display mode of this time display (after reach) is red. .

  FIG. 55 (A) shows a scene where fixed decoration symbols (“4”, “1”, “3”) which are not a big hit combination are stopped and displayed in the variable display corresponding to the current display KH0 displayed in the current display area 5K. Represents. The display KH0 this time is displayed in the hold display area 5H as the hold display HH0 (not shown) in the immediately preceding variable display (not shown), as described in parentheses as "original HH0". In addition, the hold display HH1 displayed in the hold display area 5H in FIG. 55 (A) is the hold display to be consumed next. In the effect pattern “HP5” such as the hold, the display form of the hold display is white, so that the display form of the hold display HH1 is white (circle) as shown in FIG. 55 (A).

  FIG. 55 (B) is a scene subsequent to FIG. 55 (A) and shows a scene in which variable display corresponding to the current display KH1 displayed in the current display area 5K has been started. This time display KH1 is displayed in the hold display area 5H as the hold display HH1 in FIG. 55 (A). 55 (C) to 55 (L) described below relate to the variable display corresponding to the current display KH1.

  When the variable display of FIG. 55B is started (when the hold display HH1 is exhausted), “PB3-3 (normal) From B to Super A). That is, since the effect pattern such as the hold is “HP5” and the variation pattern is “PB3-3”, the display mode before the reach of the current display KH1 is yellow (square) as shown in FIG. 55 (B). . Also, as will be described below sequentially, the display mode after reach is red (double circle), and the display mode after provisional shift is white → yellow → red → rainbow.

  FIG. 55 (C) is a scene subsequent to FIG. 55 (B), and shows a scene immediately before the left symbol “7” and the right symbol “7” enter the reach state. FIG. 55 (D) is a scene subsequent to FIG. 55 (C) and shows a scene in the reach state of “7”. In the effect pattern “HP5” such as the holding effect, the display mode after the reach is red, so that the display mode of the current display KH1 is red (double circle) as shown in FIG. 55 (D).

  FIG. 55E is a scene following FIG. 55D and shows a scene that has developed into a super reach. In FIG. 55 (E), the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed, and the background image is switched from the normal background image (the background image up to FIG. 55 (D)) to the special background image (the cherry pattern background image in the figure). The enlarged display of the decorative pattern and the special background image allow the player to recognize that the player is in super reach.

  FIG. 55 (F) is a scene following FIG. 55 (E), and shows a scene in which a decorative pattern (“7”, “6”, “7”) that is not a big hit combination is temporarily stopped and displayed. The display mode of the temporary stop display is different from the display mode of the stop display of the final stop symbol. That is, the stop display of the final stop symbol is completely stopped, but is not completely stopped in the display mode of the temporary stop display (illustration is omitted in FIG. 55 (F), for example, slight vibration). In the temporary stop display, at least one of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol does not have to be completely stopped and displayed (for example, all of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol need not be completely stopped and displayed). However, only the middle symbol that is variably displayed may not be completely stopped and displayed). 55 (G) to FIG. 55 (J) also show a temporary stop display (similar to FIG. 55 (F), illustration of a slight vibration or the like is omitted).

  Note that FIG. 55 (F) shows a temporary loss (temporary stop display of a decorative symbol) due to the fluctuation pattern “PB3-3 (developed from normal B to super A and a relief jackpot)”, but in FIG. 55 (F). This display mode is the same as or substantially the same as the stop display of the fixed decorative symbol by the variation pattern “PA3-1 (developed from normal B to super A)” except that the decorative symbol is not completely stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to easily distinguish between the temporary loss and the stop display of the fixed decorative symbol, and it is difficult to easily recognize that the display in FIG. 55 (F) is the temporary loss. Thereby, it is possible to give a surprise to a big hit later. For some players (for example, a player who is familiar with the gaming machine 1, a careful player, etc.), it may be possible to relatively easily distinguish the temporary loss from the stop display of the fixed decorative symbol. Thus, a sense of superiority can be given to some players.

  FIG. 55 (G) is a scene following FIG. 55 (F), in which the enlarged display of the decorative pattern is canceled (the decorative pattern returns to the size of the variable display start), and the background image is changed from the special background image to the normal background image. Represents the scene switched to. In addition, although the first display mode after the temporary departure is white, in FIG. 55 (G), the current display KH1 is white (circle). 55 (G) and FIG. 55 (A) except that the decorative symbol is not completely stopped and displayed in FIG. 55 (G). The indicated display mode (display mode before the next change is started) is the same or substantially the same display mode. Thereby, it is possible to give a surprise to a big hit later. For some of the players, the display mode shown in FIG. 55 (G) and the display mode shown in FIG. 55 (A) may be relatively easily distinguishable. Thus, a sense of superiority can be given to some players.

  FIG. 55 (H) shows a scene following FIG. 55 (G). FIG. 55 (H) shows a scene in which the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is again enlarged and displayed. FIG. 55 (I) shows a scene following FIG. 55 (H). The second display mode after the temporary separation is yellow, but in FIG. 55 (I), the current display KH1 is yellow (square). FIG. 55 (J) shows a scene following FIG. 55 (I). The third display mode after the temporary deviation is red, but in FIG. 55 (J), the current display KH1 is red (double circle). FIG. 55 (K) shows a scene following FIG. 55 (J). In FIG. 55 (K), the variable display of the middle symbol is started again. Further, the fourth display mode after provisional departure is iridescent, but in FIG. 55 (K), the current display KH1 is iridescent (star). FIG. 55 (L) shows a scene in which the fixed decorative symbols (“7”, “7”, “7”) as the big hit combination are stopped and displayed.

  In the display operation example of FIG. 55, the enlarged display of the decorative design is temporarily canceled after the temporary removal (see FIG. 55 (G)). However, the enlarged display of the decorative design does not need to be temporarily canceled after the temporary removal. . For example, instead of the transition from FIG. 55 (F) → FIG. 55 (G) → FIG. 55 (H), the transition may be from FIG. 55 (F) → FIG. 55 (H). Further, in the display operation example of FIG. 55, the enlarged display of the decorative pattern is temporarily canceled after the temporary removal, and then enlarged and displayed again (see FIGS. 55 (G) and 55 (H)). It is not necessary to once again display the enlarged display after the display of the enlarged display is canceled.

  Further, in the display operation example of FIG. 55, after the background image is temporarily switched from the special background image to the normal background image after the temporary departure, the background image is not switched to the special background image again (FIG. 55 (G), FIG. 55 (H)). It is also possible to switch the background image from the normal background image to the special background image again after temporarily switching the background image from the special background image to the normal background image after the temporary departure.

  In addition, when the display this time changes after the temporary disconnection, it may be suggested that the display this time changes. For example, an effect of illuminating the current display with a spotlight before the current display changes may be executed.

  According to the display operation example of FIG. 55, the display pattern of the hold etc. is “HP8” (the display mode of the hold display is red, the display mode of the current display (before reach) is red, and the display mode of the current display (reach) If the variation pattern is either “PB3-3” or “PB3-4”, the display becomes rainbow color after reach and temporarily The change (white → yellow → red → rainbow) is performed after the disconnection, but if the reach becomes rainbow after the reach, the change after the temporary disconnection may not be performed. Specifically, for example, when the display pattern such as the hold is “HP8” and the variation pattern is either “PB3-3” or “PB3-4”, the rainbow color is set as the display mode after the reach. (That is, the display is red before reach, red after reach, and white → yellow → red → rainbow).

  As described above, according to the second modification, the gaming machine 1 is a gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player, and the specific display means is Displaying a specific display (for example, this time display, etc.) indicating a degree of expectation (for example, a big hit expectation degree) controlled in an advantageous state by a display mode (for example, displaying a current display in a current display area 5K); A notification means (for example, a fixed decoration design or the like, or effect control CPU 101 or the like for displaying the fixed decoration design) for notifying whether or not the control is performed in the advantageous state is provided, and one variable display execution period (FIG. In the period from B) to FIG. 55 (L), a predetermined notification indicating that the vehicle is not controlled to be in the advantageous state (for example, notification of a temporary loss using a decorative pattern as illustrated in FIG. 55 (F)) is performed. After the specific display (For example, as shown in FIG. 55 (H) to FIG. 55 (K), the display mode of the current display is white (circle) → yellow (square) → red (double circle) → rainbow (star) A specific notification (for example, notification of a big hit with a fixed decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 55 (L)) indicating that the control is changed to an advantageous state is performed. As a result, it is possible to provide unexpectedness and enhance interest.

  Further, in the gaming machine 1, the display mode of the current display may be less likely to change after the provisional loss notification than before the reach.

  Further, in the gaming machine 1, the display mode of the current display may be less likely to change after the temporary loss notification than after the reach.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a case has been described in which, for example, a plurality of types of special symbols and effect symbols “1” to “9” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. It is not limited. For example, the symbol variably displayed and the symbol derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol different from the symbol variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, variable display may be performed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Also in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be something.

  In the above-described embodiment, the microcomputer 560 for game control determines whether or not a big hit is to be made and a prize-winning determination of a variation pattern type (pre-reading determination), and a command indicating the prize-winning determination result (a symbol designation command). , The variable category command), and the effect control microcomputer 100 executes the prefetching notice effect on the basis of the command indicating the result of the prize-winning determination. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. Alternatively, the effect control microcomputer 100 may be configured to perform a prize-winning determination (pre-reading determination). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a command specifying only the value of the random number for random determination (random R) or the random number for determination of the variation pattern type (random 2) extracted at the time of occurrence of the start winning. The effect control microcomputer 100 may be configured to make a prize-winning determination (pre-reading determination) based on a random number value specified by the command.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, it is possible to make a transition to the probable change state based on the type of the big hit that has occurred, but this is not a limitation. For example, a specific area through which a game ball can pass is provided in the special winning opening, and when a game ball passes through the specific area during a big hit, the game state shifts to a positive change state, while the game ball passes through the specific area during a big hit. May be changed to a normal state when does not pass through. In that case, by changing the ease of passing of the game ball to the specific area according to the type of the big hit, a substantial probability-change big hit and a non-probability-variable big hit may be realized. For example, the ease of passing a game ball to a specific area may be changed by making the opening time of the special winning opening different depending on the type of big hit. Specifically, a jackpot type in which the opening time of the special winning opening is long is set as a large hit (substantially variable big hit) in which the game ball easily passes to the specific area, and a large hit type in which the opening time of the special winning opening is short is played in the specific area. It may be a big hit (substantial non-probable variable hit) where the ball is difficult to pass.

  In the above-described embodiment, a gaming machine (a so-called first-type gaming machine) that shifts to a jackpot game state based on a variable display result of a special symbol or an effect symbol has been described. A gaming machine (so-called second-type gaming machine) that shifts to a jackpot game state based on a gaming ball winning (V winning) at a specific winning opening (V winning opening) in a winning ball device (so-called accessory) or Alternatively, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine combining the first type and the second type.

  In the above embodiment, in order to notify the production control microcomputer 100 of a fluctuation pattern indicating a fluctuation mode such as a fluctuation time, a type of reach effect, and the presence / absence of a pseudo-run, when the fluctuation is started, 1 Although an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted has been described, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 100 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the first command to determine whether or not there is a pseudo-run, whether or not there is a slide effect, etc. A command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode before the second stop is transmitted, and the second command indicates the type of reach and the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect. A command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode after 2 stops) may be transmitted. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform the effect control in the fluctuation display based on the fluctuation time derived from the combination of the two commands. In addition, the microcomputer 560 for game control notifies the fluctuating time by each of the two commands, and the microcomputer 100 for effect control selects the specific fluctuating mode executed at each timing. It may be. When two commands are sent, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After the first command is sent, a predetermined period elapses (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. As described above, the variation pattern is notified by using two or more commands, whereby the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the effect control board 80, the sound output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as boards on which circuits for controlling the effect device are mounted. It may be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted, and a first effect control board on which a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 27, etc.) are mounted. Two boards including two effect control boards may be provided.

  In the above-described embodiment, “different ratios” means not only those having different ratios such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. It is a concept that includes ones with different ratios in a relationship such as A: B = 100%: 0% (that is, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a command directly to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 may use another board (for example, FIG. 3). (A sound / lamp board having a function provided by the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 and a function provided by the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). The control command may be transmitted to be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 in the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control unit such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board, and the control unit receives the command. In response to this, control relating to voice control and lamp control is executed, and furthermore, the effect control microcomputer 100 that controls the effect display device 9 by changing the received command as it is or, for example, to a simplified command. May be transmitted. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment. Display control can be performed according to a command received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. When the symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player and the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, the present invention is applied to a slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. It is also possible.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which a game medium is used as a game machine is described as an example. However, the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes. The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses a game medium such as the above and gives a score when a condition for giving a prize is satisfied.

  INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY The present invention is suitably applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine in which a player can play a predetermined game.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko gaming machine 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 2nd special symbol display 9 Rendering display device 13 1st starting winning port 14 2nd starting winning port 18c Total hold storage display section 18d Active display section 20 Special variable winning ball device 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
560 game control microcomputer 80 effect control board 100 effect control microcomputer 101 effect control CPU
109 VDP

Claims (2)

A gaming machine capable of performing variable display,
The specific display corresponding to the variable display can be displayed in at least one of a display mode including a normal mode, a high expectation mode having a higher degree of expectation than the normal mode, and a suggestion mode indicating the effect contents. A specific display means,
And a demonstration execution unit capable of executing the effect of what has been suggested by specific display of the suggested embodiment,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of notice effects including at least a first notice effect and a second notice effect,
The suggested embodiment comprises a first warning first suggested embodiment suggests execution of the effect, and a second suggesting aspect suggesting execution of the second informational display,
The specific display means,
After displaying the specific display in the first suggestion mode, the display mode of the specific display is changed from the first suggestion mode to the high display mode at any one of a plurality of timings after the first notice effect is executed. It is possible to change to the expected degree aspect, it is possible to display a specific display so that the expected degree is different depending on at what timing has changed from the first suggestion aspect to the high expected degree aspect,
After displaying the specific display in the second suggestion mode, the display mode of the specific display is changed from the second suggestion mode to the high display mode at any one of a plurality of timings after the second notice effect is executed. Ri changeable der in expectation aspect, wherein the degree of expectation, depending on whether changes to the high expectation embodiment from the at any timing second suggested embodiment is capable of displaying a specific display differently Gaming machine. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A first effect display device and a second effect display device ;
Holding storage means for storing information about the variable display as holding storage;
And a change suggested demonstration execution unit capable of executing the change suggested effect suggests that a particular display of the display mode is changed,
The specific display means can display a specific display using the first effect display device in response to the hold storage,
The changes suggested demonstration execution means, across the change of specific display of the display form a first change suggested effect suggests, in the first effect display device and the second performance display device using the first effect display device It is possible to execute a second change suggestion effect that suggests a change in the display mode of the specific display by such a mode,
The ratio controlled to the advantageous state when the first change suggestion effect is executed and the display mode of the specific display changes, and when the second change suggestion effect is executed and the display mode of the specific display changes. Are different,
The display mode of the specific display may not change regardless of which of the first change suggestion effect and the second change suggestion effect is executed,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a rate at which the display mode of the specific display changes is different between when the first change suggestion effect is executed and when the second change suggestion effect is executed.

Images